Download Print this page

R&S RTP044B User Manual

High-performance oscilloscope

page of 2781

/ 2781
Bookmarks

Advertisement

Quick Links

Download this manual

®

R&S

RTP

High-Performance

Oscilloscope

User Manual

(B3Îâ2)

1803648402

Version 08

Ihr Ansprechpartner /

Your Partner:

dataTec AG

E-Mail: info@datatec.eu

>>> www.datatec.eu

Advertisement

Need help?

Need help?

Do you have a question about the RTP044B and is the answer not in the manual?

Questions and answers

Summary of Contents for R&S RTP044B

Page 1 ® R&S High-Performance Oscilloscope Ihr Ansprechpartner / Your Partner: User Manual dataTec AG E-Mail: info@datatec.eu >>> www.datatec.eu (B3Îâ2) 1803648402 Version 08...
Page 2 ® This document describes the following R&S RTP models with firmware version 5.50: ● ® R&S RTP044B (1803.7000K04) ● ® R&S RTP064B (1803.7000K06) ● ® R&S RTP084B (1803.7000K08) ● ® R&S RTP134B (1803.7000K13) ● ® R&S RTP164B (1803.7000K16) Ihr Ansprechpartner /...
Page 3 ® Contents R&S Contents 1 Safety and regulatory information............11 Safety instructions...................... 11 Labels on the product....................17 Warning messages in the documentation..............17 CE declaration of conformity..................18 Where to find key documents on Rohde & Schwarz..........18 Korea certification class A..................18 2 Preface....................
Page 4 ® Contents R&S Vertical setup......................140 Probes........................147 R&S RT-ZVC probe....................180 Differential signals....................190 Setting up the waveform..................194 6 Triggers....................199 Basics of triggering....................199 Setting up the trigger....................200 Trigger types......................202 Mode / Holdoff......................231 Conditioning......................234 Actions on trigger..................... 235 Qualification......................
Page 5 ® Contents R&S 10.2 Mask test settings..................... 431 10.3 Mask testing on eye diagrams................. 443 10.4 Working with masks....................448 11 Search functions................456 11.1 Overview: search definition and results..............456 11.2 Search setup......................457 11.3 Search gate........................472 11.4 Search display presentation..................475 12 Data and file management..............480 12.1 Save and recall user settings...................480...
Page 6 ® Contents R&S 14.13 D-PHY (option R&S RTP-K42).................. 730 14.14 M-PHY and USB SSIC (option R&S RTP-K44 and K64)......... 746 14.15 Custom: Manchester / NRZ (option R&S RTP-K50)..........776 14.16 8b/10b (option R&S RTP-K52)..................809 14.17 MDIO (option R&S RTP-K55)..................822 14.18 USB (option R&S RTP-K60)..................835 14.19 USB 3.1 (option R&S RTP-K61/K62)................
Page 7 ® Contents R&S 18.2 I/Q sampling setup....................1034 18.3 I/Q data output......................1040 18.4 Deembedding in I/Q mode..................1042 19 Jitter analysis and clock data recovery......... 1043 19.1 Jitter measurements (option R&S RTP-K12)............1044 19.2 Advanced jitter and noise (option R&S RTP-K133/K134)........1055 19.3 Clock data recovery....................
Page 8 ® Contents R&S 24.1 USB compliance test....................1215 24.2 Ethernet compliance tests (options R&S RTP-K22/K23/K25/K86)......1217 24.3 D-PHY compliance tests (option R&S RTP-K26)..........1220 24.4 eMMC compliance tests (option R&S RTP-K92)..........1221 24.5 PCIe compliance tests (option R&S RTP-K81)............. 1221 24.6 DDR3 compliance tests (option R&S RTP-K91)...........
Page 9 ® Contents R&S 26.16 Data management....................1710 26.17 Signal configuration....................1742 26.18 Protocols........................1768 26.19 Mixed signal option (MSO, R&S RTP-B1)............. 2445 26.20 Waveform generator (option R&S RTP-B6)............2472 26.21 Pulse source and TDR/TDT analysis (options R&S RTP-B7/K130)....2495 26.22 I/Q software interface (option R&S RTP-K11)............2504 26.23 Jitter analysis and clock data recovery..............
Page 10 ® Contents R&S User Manual 1803.6484.02 ─ 08...
Page 11 ® Safety and regulatory information R&S Safety instructions 1 Safety and regulatory information The product documentation helps you to use the product safely and efficiently. Where do I find safety information? Safety information is part of the product documentation. It warns you of potential dan- gers and gives instructions on how to prevent personal injury or damage caused by dangerous situations.
Page 12 ® Safety and regulatory information R&S Safety instructions Reconfigure or adjust the product only as described in the product documentation or the specifications document. Any other modifications can affect safety and are not per- mitted. Never open the casing of the product. Only service personnel authorized by Rohde &...
Page 13 ® Safety and regulatory information R&S Safety instructions If you mount products in a rack, ensure that the rack has sufficient load capacity and stability. Observe the specifications of the rack manufacturer. Always install the prod- ucts from the bottom shelf to the top shelf so that the rack stands securely. Secure the product so that it cannot fall off the rack.
Page 14 ® Safety and regulatory information R&S Safety instructions Performing measurements Take the following measures for your safety: ● To ascertain a voltage-free state, use an appropriate voltage tester. Any measure- ment setup including an oscilloscope is not suitable for this purpose. ●...
Page 15 ® Safety and regulatory information R&S Safety instructions The delivered input leads might have a jacket wear indicator that indicates a worn jacket by different jacket color. In this case, do not use the input lead. Replace it with a new one. ●...
Page 16 ® Safety and regulatory information R&S Safety instructions Measurement categories IEC 61010-2-030 defines measurement categories that rate instruments on their ability to resist short transient overvoltages that occur in addition to the working voltage. Use the measurement setup only in electrical environments for which they are rated. ●...
Page 17 ® Safety and regulatory information R&S Warning messages in the documentation Heavy product Be careful when lifting, moving or carrying the product. Carrying the product requires a suffi- cient number of persons or transport equipment. Electrical hazard Indicates live parts. Risk of electric shock, fire, personal injury or even death. Protective conductor terminal Connect this terminal to a grounded external conductor or to protective ground.
Page 18 ® Safety and regulatory information R&S Korea certification class A NOTICE Potential risks of damage. Could result in damage to the supported product or to other property. 1.4 CE declaration of conformity The CE declaration of conformity of the instrument is delivered with the product. Keep the document for further reference.
Page 19 ® Preface R&S Documentation overview 2 Preface 2.1 Key features The R&S RTP high-performance oscilloscopes combine superior signal integrity with fastest acquisition rate. It combines multiple instrument capabilities for time-correlated debugging in one box. Outstanding key features are: Real-time signal integrity ●...
Page 20 ® Preface R&S Documentation overview Getting started manual Introduces the R&S RTP and describes how to set up and start working with the instru- ment, and describes basic operations. A printed English version is included in the delivery. Editions in other languages are available on the product website. Instrument help The help offers quick, context-sensitive access to the complete information for the firm- ware basic functionality and applications.
Page 21 ® Preface R&S Documentation overview – R&S RT-ZF7 Automotive Ethernet T&D fixture – R&S RT-ZF7A and R&S RT-ZF7P SMA Adaptors – R&S RT-ZF8 Automotive Ethernet compliance test fixture Safety instructions Provides safety information in many languages. The printed document is delivered with the product.
Page 22 ® Preface R&S Options described in this document Find various videos on Rohde & Schwarz products and test and measurement topics on YouTube: https://www.youtube.com/@Rohde-Schwarz 2.3 Options described in this document In addition to the base unit, the following options are described in this documentation: Type Designation Order No.
Page 23 ® Preface R&S Conventions used in the documentation Type Designation Order No. R&S RTP-K60 USB 1.0/1.1/2.0/HSIC serial triggering and decoding 1337.8791.02 R&S RTP-K61 USB 3.1 Gen 1 serial triggering and decoding 1337.8804.02 R&S RTP-K62 USB 3.1 Gen 2serial triggering and decoding 1337.9100.02 R&S RTP-K63 USB-PD serial triggering and decoding...
Page 24 ® Preface R&S Conventions used in the documentation Convention Description "Graphical user interface ele- All names of graphical user interface elements on the screen, such as ments" dialog boxes, menus, options, buttons, and softkeys are enclosed by quotation marks. [Keys] Key and knob names are enclosed by square brackets.
Page 25 ® Getting started R&S Preparing for use 3 Getting started Note: the following chapters are identical to those in the R&S RTP Getting Started manual for R&S RTP instruments. ● Preparing for use.....................25 ● Instrument tour......................32 ● Operating the instrument..................44 3.1 Preparing for use Here, you can find basic information about setting up the instrument for the first time or...
Page 26 ® Getting started R&S Preparing for use – Environments that are directly connected to a low-voltage supply network that supplies residential buildings ● Class A equipment is intended for use in industrial environments. It can cause radio disturbances in residential environments due to possible conducted and radi- ated disturbances.
Page 27 ® Getting started R&S Preparing for use Left = Stacked correctly Right = Stacked incorrectly, too many products 4. NOTICE! Overheating can damage the product. Prevent overheating as follows: ● Keep a minimum distance of 10 cm between the fan openings of the product and any object in the vicinity to provide sufficient airflow and ventilation.
Page 28 ® Getting started R&S Preparing for use 4. Tighten all screws at the rack brackets with a tightening torque of 1.2 Nm to secure the product at the rack. To unmount the product from a rack 1. Loosen the screws at the rack brackets. 2.
Page 29 ® Getting started R&S Preparing for use The nominal ranges are the following. They are also indicated on a label near the power connector on the instrument and in the specifications document. ● 100 V to 240 V AC at 50 Hz to 60 Hz, and 100 V to 130 V at 400 Hz, with maximal 10% voltage fluctuation on line ●...
Page 30 ® Getting started R&S Preparing for use Remote command for firmware shutdown: on page 1305. SYSTem:EXIT To disconnect from power The product is in the standby state. 1. NOTICE! Risk of data loss. If you disconnect the product from power when it is in the ready state, you can lose settings and data.
Page 31 ® Getting started R&S Preparing for use 2. To configure the keyboard properties, press the Windows key on the external key- board. 3. Tap the "Find" icon (magnifier) on the Windows taskbar. 4. To configure the keyboard: a) Type keybord. b) Select "Edit language and keyboard options".
Page 32 ® Getting started R&S Instrument tour 3.2 Instrument tour This chapter describes the front and rear panels of the instrument including all function keys and connectors. 3.2.1 Front panel This section provides an overview of the R&S RTP front panel and explains the various connectors and the option slots at the front.
Page 33 ® Getting started R&S Instrument tour 10 = USB connectors 11 = Connectors for probe compensation and grounding 12 = [Power] key The keys and controls are described in Section 3.2.3, "Keys and controls", on page 37. 3.2.1.1 Connectors Channel inputs and external trigger input The R&S RTP has four channel inputs to connect the input signals, and an external trigger input to control the measurement by an external signal.
Page 34 ® Getting started R&S Instrument tour Mixed signal option R&S RTP-B1 / digital extension port R&S RTP-B1E The mixed signal option R&S RTP-B1 provides logic analizer functionality and 16 digi- tal channels. It also can connect the R&S RT-ZVC multi-channel power probe. The connectors are used to connect two logical probes with 8 digital channels each (D0 to D7 and D8 to D15), or two flat interface cables of R&S RT-ZVC.
Page 35 ® Getting started R&S Instrument tour Figure 3-2: Rear panel of R&S RTP 1 = AC power supply connector and main power switch 2 = USB device connector, type B 3 = USB connectors, type A 4 = LAN connector 5 = HDMI connector for external monitor 6 = DisplayPort connector 7 = Kensington lock slot to secure the instrument against theft...
Page 36 ® Getting started R&S Instrument tour USB Device USB 3.0 interface of type B (device USB), to be used for remote control of the instru- ment. Two USB type A connectors that comply with standard USB 3.0. They are used to con- nect devices like keyboard, mouse and flash drive to store and reload instrument set- tings and measurement data.
Page 37 ® Getting started R&S Instrument tour The output frequency of the OCXO is 10 MHz, the impedance is 50 Ω. For detailed specifications, refer to the specifications document. DDI 40G Optional digital data interface for input and output of digital data. Option slot Slot to install one of the options R&S RTP-B1 (MSO) or R&S RTP-B1E (for R&S RT- ZVC) if both slots at the front panel are used for other options.
Page 38 ® Getting started R&S Instrument tour Remote command: on page 1336 on page 1337 STOP [Single] Starts a defined number of acquisitions. The [Single] key lights green when the acquisi- tion is running. When the acquisition is stopped, the key lights red. To set the number of acquisitions, select "Menu"...
Page 39 ® Getting started R&S Instrument tour [Scale] The rotary knob adjusts the time scale for all signals. The time scale is also known as timebase. Turn clockwise to stretch the waveforms. Doing so, the scale value time/div decreases. Press the knob to toggle between coarse and fine scale adjustment. [Position] The rotary knob changes the horizontal position of the waveform or the position of the reference point on the screen.
Page 40 ® Getting started R&S Instrument tour [C<n>] Turns on and selects a channel. If the channel is active, the key lights up in the corre- sponding channel color. The effect of the keypress depends on state of the channel: ● If channel is off: turns on the channel and selects it.
Page 41 ® Getting started R&S Instrument tour [Math] Opens the "Math" dialog, where you can configure the calculation of mathematical waveforms using various mathematic operations on other waveforms. Press the key repeatedly to toggle the subtabs of the math waveforms. After the last subtab, the key closes the dialog.
Page 42 ® Getting started R&S Instrument tour 3.2.3.5 Spectrum and User keys [Spectrum] Opens and closes the "Math" dialog with FFT settings. The key lights up if an FFT is active. [Freq Span] Opens the FFT setup to configure the frequency, span, and other FFT parameters. [Peak] Opens the "Peak List"...
Page 43 ® Getting started R&S Instrument tour [Multiuse] The multiuse knob has various functions. It lights up when a function is active on the knob. ● In numeric entry fields: turn to increase or decrease the value. ● To set cursor positions, histogram areas, and mask points in input boxes: press to toggle the parameter, turn clockwise to increase the value or turn counterclockwise to decrease it.
Page 44 ® Getting started R&S Operating the instrument See also: Section 4.5.1, "Hardkeys: function assignment", on page 98 [Preset] Resets the instrument to a predefined state and starts the continuous acquisition. All measurements, mask tests, zoom, and most individual settings are deleted, and all channels except for channel 1 are disabled.
Page 45 ® Getting started R&S Operating the instrument Alternatively, you can use Virtual Network Computing (VNC), which requires installation of the VNC server on the R&S RTP. Installation and configuration are described in the application note "Remote Monitoring and Control of the R&S RTP with a Web Browser", available on the Rohde &...
Page 46 ® Getting started R&S Operating the instrument Figure 3-3: Display information 1 = Diagram 2 = Grid 3 = Trigger position 4 = Reference point (distance from trigger position to reference point = horizontal position) 5 = Trigger, horizontal and acquisition label 6 = Notifications 7 = Zoom area 8 = Zoom diagram...
Page 47 ® Getting started R&S Operating the instrument To arrange the diagrams on the screen, the Rohde & Schwarz SmartGrid function helps you to find the target place simply and quickly. For details, see Section 3.3.5, "Rohde & Schwarz SmartGrid", on page 54. You can also adjust the diagram size by dragging the diagram border.
Page 48 ® Getting started R&S Operating the instrument 1 = Sample rate 2 = Record length 3 = Decimation 4 = Number of acquired waveforms Reference point The reference point marks the rescaling center. If you modify the time scale, the refer- ence point remains fixed on the screen, and the scale is stretched or compressed to both sides of the reference point.
Page 49 ® Getting started R&S Operating the instrument Figure 3-7: Signal label 1 = Vertical scale 2 = Offset 3 = Bandwidth 4 = Coupling 5 = Termination If the signal bar contains many signal icons, and not all icons are visible, touch one of the icons and scroll left or right until the required icon appears.
Page 50 ® Getting started R&S Operating the instrument Figure 3-8: Control elements on the touchscreen = Toolbar = Tab in a dialog box = Dialog box = Result table (docked) = Signal bar = Menu Not shown = Input box Toolbar (1) The icons on the toolbar provide quick and easy access to the most important function- ality.
Page 51 ® Getting started R&S Operating the instrument Result table (4) If you perform cursor or automatic measurements, mask testing, or a search, the result table shows the results of the action. The position of the result table is adjustable. It can be docked (default for measurements), floating, minimized to a result icon on the signal bar, or displayed in a separate diagram on the screen.
Page 52 ® Getting started R&S Operating the instrument 3.3.4 Working with waveforms The R&S RTP can create and display many waveform types. The most importand are: ● Channel waveforms: Up to three waveforms per input channel can be shown. For a four-channel instru- ment, 12 channel waveforms are available.
Page 53 ® Getting started R&S Operating the instrument Waveform handling The R&S RTP can show and analyze many waveforms. To handle this multitude while keeping track of it, the R&S RTP provides intelligent support: ● The color system helps to distinguish the waveforms. The color of the vertical rotary knobs indicates the signal that is focused (selected).
Page 54 ® Getting started R&S Operating the instrument To select a waveform ► Choose one of the following ways: ● Tap the waveform in the waveform diagram. ● To select a channel, reference, or math waveform, press the corresponding key. ● Tap the signal icon.
Page 55 ® Getting started R&S Operating the instrument Figure 3-9: SmartGrid positions 1 = In the existing diagram, overlay of signal 2 = New diagram on the left or right 3 = New diagram above or below 4 = New diagram on top of the existing diagram 5 = XY-diagram 6 = YX-diagram The diagram configuration is deleted when you use [Preset] and *RST.
Page 56 ® Getting started R&S Operating the instrument 3. To change the size of a diagram, tap the handle between two diagram frames and drag it to the required position. Remote commands: see Section 26.7.2.4, "Smartgrid", on page 1311. 3.3.6 Toolbar The toolbar provides direct access to important control and measurement functions.
Page 57 ® Getting started R&S Operating the instrument 2. Tap the icon of the function in the toolbar. If there are many functions on the toolbar, and not all icons are visible, scroll the toolbar using the arrow on the right end of the toolbar. 3.
Page 58 ® Getting started R&S Operating the instrument 3.3.6.3 Toolbar functions This section describes all toolbar functions in detail. One-click actions Interactive actions Undo Zoom Redo Search Help Cursor Recall Mask Test Save Histogram Image Measure Report Quick meas Clear Autoset and Preset Annotate Run / Stop and Single Save Reference...
Page 59 ® Getting started R&S Operating the instrument One-click actions Interactive actions Advanced Eye (option R&S RTP-K136/K137) Delete Signal Config Ext. FE (option R&S RTP-K553) You can configure the content of the toolbar, see Section 3.3.6.2, "Configuring the tool- bar", on page 57. The following list describes at first the default toolbar functions and then the additional functions.
Page 60 ® Getting started R&S Operating the instrument Clear Deletes all measurement results including long term measurement and statistics, all waveforms, and the history. Remote command: on page 1332 DISPlay:CLR Autoset and Preset Performs an autoset, or a preset to a default state. The icons have the same function- ality as the corresponding keys on the front panel.
Page 61 ® Getting started R&S Operating the instrument Remote command: on page 1483 LAYout:ZOOM:ADD Hardware zoom ← Zoom Changes the instrument settings - horizontal and vertical scales as well as trigger level and offset - to display a part of the diagram in greater detail. Coupled zoom ←...
Page 62 ® Getting started R&S Operating the instrument Measure Performs automatic measurements. Tapping the icon opens the overlay menu, where you select the category, the measurement types and measured waveform. Tap the dia- gram with the waveform to be measured. To define a measurement gate, draw a rect- angle on the screen.
Page 63 ® Getting started R&S Operating the instrument Zone trigger Defines a zone trigger, which combines the trigger condition with the intersection or non-intersection of one or more zones or masks. Tap the icon and then tap the corner points of the zone on the screen. Tap "Finish zone".
Page 64 ® Getting started R&S Operating the instrument The results are now shown in a floating result box. Note: Once you undock the measurement results, you cannot move the result box back to the docked position. 2. Touch and hold the title of the result box and drag the box on the screen. The SmartGrid indicates where the result box will be placed.
Page 65 ® Getting started R&S Operating the instrument 3.3.8 Using dialogs Dialogs provide groups of related settings and allow to make selections and enter data in an organized way. To open a dialog ► Perform one of the following actions: ● Open the "Menu", and select the menu entry.
Page 66 ® Getting started R&S Operating the instrument 4. To restore the complete dialog box, tap the "Maximize" icon in the small box. 3.3.9 Entering data To set parameter values and enter other data, you use the various knobs and the on- screen keypad or keyboard.
Page 67 ® Getting started R&S Operating the instrument 2. Enter the numeric value using one of the following methods: ● To use the default value, tap "Reset" (if available). ● To use the minimum or maximum value, tap "Min" or "Max", respectively. ●...
Page 68 ® Getting started R&S Operating the instrument 2. Enter the text as you would do on a normal keyboard. ● To enter a series of capital characters, tap "Caps". To enter one capital character, tap "Shift". ● To get the value that was used before the keyboard opened, tap "Cur". ●...
Page 69 ® Getting started R&S Operating the instrument The color of the dot before the text indicates the severity: gray for information, orange for warnings, and red for errors. ► To read the notifications, tap "Notification". You can also delete the list of notifications. 1.
Page 70 ® Getting started R&S Operating the instrument Note: The "Help" icon disables automatically when you tap a parameter. To show another tooltip, tap the "Help" icon again. To open general help 1. Open the "Menu". 2. Tap the "Help" icon. The help window opens with the "Contents"...
Page 71 ® Getting started R&S Operating the instrument 3. Enter the string you want to find. If you enter several strings with blanks between, topics containing all words are found (same as AND operator). For advanced search, consider the following: ● To find a defined string of several words, enclose it in quotation marks.
Page 72 ® Instrument setup R&S System settings 4 Instrument setup Access: "Settings" menu > "Settings" dialog. In the "Settings" dialog, you can adapt various instrument settings to your require- ments, such as language, display appearance, and assign functions to some keys. The following settings and procedures are described in the current chapter: ●...
Page 73 ® Instrument setup R&S System settings 4.1.1 About settings Access: "Menu" > "Settings" > "System" > "About" FW Update Opens the Firmware update dialog box. Copy to clipboard Copies the instrument information, which you see in the dialog box, to the clipboard. Open Source Ack Opens the open source acknowledgment document, which provides verbatim license texts of the used open source software.
Page 74 ® Instrument setup R&S System settings Device name Indicates the currently defined computer name, the defined IP address and DHCP address enabling. These values are required to configure the instrument for work in a network. NOTICE! Risk of network problems. All parameters can be edited here; however, beware that changing the device name has major effects in a network.
Page 75 ® Instrument setup R&S System settings Parameter Value TCP/IP mode DHCP + auto IP address Dynamic DNS Enabled ICMP ping Enabled Password for LAN configuration LxiWebIfc The LAN settings are configured using the instrument's web browser. Advanced Opens the standard Windows "Network Connections" dialog box to configure a net- work connection.
Page 76 ® Instrument setup R&S Option settings Time settings Opens the standard Windows "Date and Time Properties" dialog box to set the correct date and time. Only users with administrator rights can fulfill this task. Note: Usually date and time are set correctly. To adjust your regional time, select the correct time zone rather than changing the time.
Page 77 ® Instrument setup R&S Option settings The license type defines the duration of applicability and the portability of a license. The following license types are provided: evaluation, permanent, portable, quantified, timed with duration of 1, 3, 6 or 12 months. A license can also be in the states deacti- vated and expired.
Page 78 ® Instrument setup R&S Option settings Install from file If you got a license file, install the license here. Tap "Open" to open the file selection dialog, or enter the complete path and filename. For details, see Section 12.5, "File selection dialog", on page 521.
Page 79 ® Instrument setup R&S Appearance settings a) Optional: If the status icon ( , ) in the Windows notification area is not shown yet, click "Start > All Programs > R&S License Server > License Server Manager"". The icon is now available in the Windows notification area. b) Optional: If the status is (stopped), select the icon, and then select "Start...
Page 80 ® Instrument setup R&S Appearance settings You can then select one of the waveforms of the selected category with "Color source". Color source Selects the waveform to which the color table and the labels are assigned. A spectrogram (option R&S RTP-K37) always has the same color as the math (spec- trum) waveform from which it is created.
Page 81 ® Instrument setup R&S Appearance settings The following color tables are provided: ● "False colors": color changes gradually in a wide color spectrum. ● "M-Hot" ● "M-Hsv" ● "M-Jet" ● "Spectrum": colors display the wave lengths of the light. Low cumulative occur- rence is displayed blue like high wave length.
Page 82 ® Instrument setup R&S Appearance settings on page 1308 DISPlay:COLor:PALette:POINt:INSert on page 1308 DISPlay:COLor:PALette:POINt:ADD on page 1309 DISPlay:COLor:PALette:POINt[:VALue] on page 1309 DISPlay:COLor:PALette:POINt:COUNt? on page 1309 DISPlay:COLor:PALette:POINt:REMove on page 1308 DISPlay:COLor:PALette:COUNt? 4.3.3 Grid appearance settings Access: "Settings" > "Appearance" > "Grid" Show grid If selected, a grid is displayed in the diagram area.
Page 83 ® Instrument setup R&S Appearance settings Show fine grid scale If selected, the crosshair is displayed as a ruler with scale markers. If disabled, the crosshair is shown as dashed lines. Remote command: on page 1310 DISPlay:DIAGram:FINegrid Show crosshair If selected, a crosshair is displayed in the diagram area. A crosshair allows you to select a specific data point by its co-ordinates.
Page 84 ® Instrument setup R&S Appearance settings Show tabs always If selected, the tab titles of all diagrams are displayed: "Diagram1", "Diagram2" ... If cleared, the tab titles are not shown except for titles in a tabbed diagram. In tabbed diagrams, the tab titles are required to change the tabs. Remote command: on page 1315 DISPlay:DIAGram:TITLe...
Page 85 ® Instrument setup R&S Appearance settings Make sure that the option is disabled if the zoom area and the evaluation gate are of nearly the same size to avoid conflicts in operation. Gate transparency Sets the transparency of the area that is defined as measurement or search gate. The setting only takes effect if "Show gate"...
Page 86 ® Instrument setup R&S Appearance settings Show / Source Selects the souce of the label and enables the display. Remote command: on page 1320 DISPlay:SIGNal:LABel:SHOW Position mode Defines the label position either relative to the diagram or with absolute values accord- ing to the units of the waveform.
Page 87 ® Instrument setup R&S Appearance settings Font size Defines the size of the labels in the diagram. Remote command: on page 1317 DISPlay:SIGNal:LABel:FONTsize Labels For each waveform, the "Labels" table shows the defined labels with their visibility state, label texts and positions. The labels belog to the selected waveform. Enter the label text and the horizontal and vertical positions for each label.
Page 88 ® Instrument setup R&S Appearance settings Dialog With these settings, you can change the appearance of the dialogs. Font size ← Dialog Defines the font size of the text in dialog boxes. Dialog transparency ← Dialog Defines the transparency of the dialog box background. For high transparency values, you can see the waveform display in the background, and possibly check the effect of the changed setting.
Page 89 ® Instrument setup R&S Appearance settings Remote command: on page 1323 DISPlay:EXTended:PORDialogs on page 1324 DISPlay:EXTended:POSDialogs 4.3.7 Cursor appearance settings Access: "Settings" > "Appearance" > "Cursor" tab Cursor style Defines how the cursor is displayed in the diagram. "Lines" The cursors are displayed as lines. "Line &...
Page 90 ® Instrument setup R&S Appearance settings 4.3.8 Measurement appearance settings Access: "Settings" > "Appearance" > "Measurement" tab Group results If enabled, all results are shown in one result box (default). If disabled, the results of each measurement group are shown in a separate result box. The default position is ignored.
Page 91 ® Instrument setup R&S Appearance settings 4.3.9 Peak list appearance settings Access: "Settings" > "Appearance" > "Peak List" tab For peak lists measurements only. You can enable the "Peak list" for "Spectrum" mea- surements, see Section 8.2.6, "Spectrum measurements", on page 370. In this dialog, you can configure the look of the labels for peaks in the spectrum dia- gram.
Page 92 ® Instrument setup R&S Appearance settings Show labels Switches the display of the mask test name on or off. To change the name of the mask test, open the "Mask Test" dialog > "Define Mask" tab. Double-tap the mask test subtab and enter the new mask test name. Remote command: on page 1327 MTESt:LABel...
Page 93 ® Instrument setup R&S Appearance settings Color Sets the color of samples that violated the mask. Remote command: on page 1329 MTESt:COLor:MATCh Mask without violation Sets the color of masks segments that were not hit. Remote command: on page 1328 MTESt:COLor:UNMatch Mask with violation Sets the color of mask segments the signal has entered into.
Page 94 ® Instrument setup R&S Display settings Table position Defines the position of the decode table on the screen. "Floating" Floating result box in front of the diagrams. "Preview"" Result icon on the sidebar. "Docked" Fixed tab below the diagrams. Remote command: on page 1772 DISPlay:RESultboxes:DEPosition 4.4 Display settings...
Page 95 ® Instrument setup R&S Display settings Enable If enabled, each new data point in the diagram area remains on the screen for the duration that is defined using Time, or as long as Infinite persistence is selected. If disabled, the waveform points are displayed only for the current acquisition. Remote command: on page 1330 DISPlay:PERSistence[:STATe]...
Page 96 ® Instrument setup R&S Display settings 4.4.2 Signal settings Access: "Menu" > "Settings" > "Display" > "Signal" Intensity This value determines the strength of the waveform line in the diagram. Enter a per- centage between 0 (not visible) and 100% (strong). The default value is 50%. You can also use the [Intensity] knob on the left side of the screen to adjust the wave- form intensity directly.
Page 97 ® Instrument setup R&S Display settings Brightness Changes the background luminosity of the touchscreen. 4.4.4 Monitors settings Access: "Menu" > "Settings" > "Display" > "Monitors" In the "Monitors" tab you can extend or duplicate the instrument display to a second monitor or projector (external display).
Page 98 ® Instrument setup R&S Frontpanel settings ● "Duplicate": the external display shows the same content as the instrument display. ● "Extend": the instrument display and the external display show different content. ● "Projector only": the instrument's user interface is only shown on the external dis- play, the instrument display is off.
Page 99 ® Instrument setup R&S Frontpanel settings Camera hardkey action The Camera key on the left side of the display is a shortcut key that initiates an associ- ated action. You can assign one of the following actions: ● Save a screenshot ●...
Page 100 ® Instrument setup R&S Frontpanel settings See also: "[Position]" on page 41. Horizontal Selects the action that you want to perform with the horizontal [Position] knob. It can change the horizontal position of the trigger point (trigger offset), or the reference point. See also: "[Position]"...
Page 101 ® Instrument setup R&S Frontpanel settings The larger the region, the easier is it to select an element. However, when selecting data points, for example, a large frame does not allow you to select precisely. Drag threshold Defines the maximum number of pixels around an element (e.g. data point) within which your pointing device must stay to "click"...
Page 102 ® Instrument setup R&S Preset setup 2. Select the "Touchscreen" tab. 3. Tap "Calibrate". A blinking cross appears in the lower left corner of the screen. 4. Touch and hold the cross until "OK" is shown. 5. Repeat this action for the crosses in the other corners. 6.
Page 103 ® Instrument setup R&S Preset setup Saveset to be loaded on preset Enter the filename to load or to save a user-defined preset. The file format is .dfl and cannot be changed. "Open" Loads the indicated file. The settings from this file are applied when "Enable user defined preset"...
Page 104 ® Instrument setup R&S Maintenance settings To save a user-defined preset 1. Open the "Menu" > "Settings" > "Preset" tab. 2. Enter a name for the preset file. Select the file format. 3. Tap Save. Note: If you want to store the file in another directory than the default one, select "Save As".
Page 105 ® Instrument setup R&S Maintenance settings 4.7.2 Alignment When data from several input channels is displayed at the same time, it may be neces- sary to align the data vertically or horizontally to synchronize the time bases or ampli- tudes and positions. This is the case, for example, when strong temperature changes occur (>...
Page 106 ® Instrument setup R&S Maintenance settings Access: "Settings" >"Maintenance" > "Alignment" > "Show results" 4.7.2.3 Performing a self-alignment The self-alignment aligns the data from several input channels vertically and horizon- tally to synchronize the timebases, amplitudes and positions. The self-alignment proc- ess includes a basic hardware check.
Page 107 ® Instrument setup R&S Maintenance settings 4.7.3 Self-test The instrument's self-test checks the hardware for correct operation. Perform the self- test if you suspect problems in hardware operation. Access: "Settings" >"Maintenance" > "Selftest" The test can take several minutes. The summary result is shown in the "State" field, which can be helpful in case you need support.
Page 108 ® Instrument setup R&S Save / recall Remote command: on page 1335 DIAGnostic:SERVice:PARTnumber on page 1335 DIAGnostic:SERVice:SERialnumber? on page 1334 SYSTem:DFPRint Mainboard This tab provides information on the mainboard configuration in your instrument. Frontend This tab provides information on the frontend configuration in your instrument. Frontpanel This tab provides information on the front panel module installed in your instrument.
Page 109 ® Instrument setup R&S Save / recall 4.8.1.1 Autonaming settings In this tab, you can define the pattern for automatic file name generation. This name is used as the default file name. The default path is the storage location for all saved files and their subdirectories.
Page 110 ® Instrument setup R&S Save / recall Index If enabled, inserts an index. Remote command: on page 1739 MMEMory:AUTonaming:INDex Time If enabled, inserts the current time. Remote command: on page 1739 MMEMory:AUTonaming:TIME Default path for all file operations Defines the default path displayed in the file selection dialog box for loading and stor- ing operations.
Page 111 ® Instrument setup R&S Save / recall <Prefix>_<UserText>_<Date>_<Index>_<Time> The prefix depends on the data type to be stored and cannot be changed by the user. The other elements can be enabled or disabled as required. 1. Tap "Menu" > "Settings". 2.
Page 112 ® Instrument setup R&S Save / recall The following events can start an application: ● Trigger event ● Mask violation ● Successful completion of mask test ● Limit or margin violation of measurements ● Successful completion of limit and margin tests Set the path of the application executable, optional parameters, and the working direc- tory as in a Windows shortcut definition.
Page 113 ® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Basics 5 Acquisition and waveform setup This chapter describes the horizontal and vertical settings as well as the acquisition and probe setup. 5.1 Basics This chapter provides background information on the essential settings in the vertical and horizontal systems, on acquisition setup and probing.
Page 114 ® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Basics Figure 5-1: Input range and resolution of the ADC With R&S RTP, you can work with multiple diagrams, and each diagram obtains the full vertical resolution, no matter where the diagram is placed. Therefore, use a separate diagram for each waveform instead of the traditional setup that arranges the wave- forms side by side in one diagram.
Page 115 ® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Basics Figure 5-3: R&S RTP setup of multiple waveforms in separate diagrams: best resolution 5.1.1.3 Bandwidth For analog applications, the highest signal frequency determines the required oscillo- scope bandwidth. The oscilloscope bandwidth should be slightly higher than the maxi- mum frequency included in the analog test signal to measure the amplitude with very little measurement error.
Page 116 ® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Basics 5.1.2 Sampling and acquisition The vertical system of a digital oscilloscope conditions the test signal in a way that the following A/D converter (ADC) can transform the measured voltage into digital data. 5.1.2.1 Sampling and processing The A/D converter samples the continuous signal under test at specific points in time and delivers digital values called ADC samples.
Page 117 ® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Basics Figure 5-4: Waveforms acquired with different sample rates To avoid aliasing, the sample rate must be set to a value 3 to 5 times the fastest fre- quency component of the signal. A higher sample rate increases signal fidelity, increa- ses the chance to capture glitches and other signal anomalies, and improves the zoom-in capabilities.
Page 118 ® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Basics The determining point of an acquisition is the trigger. The instrument acquires continu- ously and keeps the sample points to fill the pre-trigger part of the waveform record. When the trigger occurs, the instrument continues acquisition until the post-trigger part of the waveform record is filled.
Page 119 ® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Basics When you set up horizontal parameters, you can choose whether the record length or the resolution remains constant. ● With constant resolution, increasing the time scale also increases the record length, and vice versa. You can limit the record length to a maximum value. ●...
Page 120 ® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Basics An ideal probe fulfills the following requirements: ● Safe and reliable contacts ● Infinite bandwidth ● The probe should not load the signal source and thus impact the circuit operation. ● The connection should not introduce or suppress signal components (hum, noise, filter) and thus degrade or distort the transferred signal.
Page 121 ® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Basics                   system probe scope To measure the signal with low measurement error, the system bandwidth should be higher than the highest frequency component of the signal.
Page 122 ® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Basics Differential active probes Differential active probes are designed to measure signals that are referenced against each other, and voltages that are not references to ground, for example twisted-pair signal lines. The R&S RT-ZD probes are differential probes with high input impedance, they can be used to measure voltages between any two test points.
Page 123 ® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Horizontal Differenti alGain CMRR  CommonMode Gain In addition, the R&S ProbeMeter of R&S RT-ZD differential probes can measure differ- ential and common mode DC voltages. The measurement result is displayed on the oscilloscope's screen. The common mode measurement of the R&S ProbeMeter allows you to check the input voltage relative to ground.
Page 124 ® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Horizontal Time scale Sets the horizontal scale for all channel and math waveforms in seconds per division. Increase the scale to see a longer time interval of the waveform. Decrease the scale to see it in more detail. The scale has a point that remains fixed on the screen when the scale value is changing - the reference point.
Page 125 ® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Horizontal 5.2.2 Zoom settings The zoom settings are described in Section 7.1, "Zoom", on page 266. 5.2.3 Roll settings Access: "Menu" > "Horizontal" > "Roll" tab. In this dialog, you can define the roll mode. Roll mode Selects, if the roll mode is set automatically by the instrument or if it is turned off.
Page 126 ® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Horizontal accuracy If the acquisition time is >50 s, the record length limit is effective, and the maximum sample rate depends on the acquisition time: ≤ 100 MSa / Acquisition time. Sample rate If the acquisition time is <50 s, the maximum sample rate in roll mode depends on the number of active channels: Sample rate = 2 MSa/s / Number of active wfms.
Page 127 ® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Horizontal accuracy Make sure that the correct channel tab is selected. User skew If enabled, the "Skew offset" value is used for compensation. Remote command: on page 1404 CHANnel<ch>:SKEW:MANual Skew offset Sets a delay value, which is known from the circuit specifics but cannot be compensa- ted by the instrument automatically.
Page 128 ® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Horizontal accuracy Extend user skew Allows you to set higher value in "Skew offset" to compensate for the delay of the mea- surement setup. Without extension, the deskew range is ±100 ns, and delays shorter than the sample interval can be compensated.
Page 129 ® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Acquire settings 5.4 Acquire settings The "Acquire" dialog provides the acquisition configuration for channel and spectrum waveforms. 5.4.1 Setup settings The "Setup" tab in the "Acquire" dialog provides the settings for the time axis. For background information, see Section 5.1.3, "Horizontal system",...
Page 130 ® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Acquire settings ● Section 5.1.3, "Horizontal system", on page 118 Remote command: on page 1341 ACQuire:SRReal Record length Indicates the number of waveform samples that build the waveform across the acquisi- tion time. Remote command: on page 1342 ACQuire:POINts[:VALue] Resolution...
Page 131 ® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Acquire settings "sin (x)/x" Two adjacent ADC sample points are connected by a sin(x)/x curve, and also the adjoining sample points are considered by this curve. The interpolated points are located on the resulting curve. This inter- polation method is precise and shows the best signal curve.
Page 132 ® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Acquire settings 5.4.2 Mode settings Access: "Menu" > "Acquire" > "Mode" tab. Decimation Selects the decimation mode. Decimation reduces the data stream of the ADC to a stream of waveform points with lower sample rate and a less precise time resolution. The R&S RTP uses decimation, if the waveform "Sample rate"...
Page 133 ® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Acquire settings "RMS" The waveform point is the root mean square of n sample values. Thus, the RMS value reflects the instantaneous power. This arith- metic mode is used to average a measured power waveform. Linear averaging of power signals causes an error dependent on the noise of the signal to be averaged.
Page 134 ® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Acquire settings Remote command: on page 1344 ACQuire:MUWaveform Average count (N-single count) Access: ● "Menu" > "Acquire" > "Setup" tab > "N-single count" ● "Menu" > "Acquire" > "Mode" tab > "Average count" ● "Menu"...
Page 135 ® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Acquire settings 5.4.3 Segmented settings Access: "Menu" > "Acquire" > "Segmented" tab. Fast segmentation Switches the fast segmentation mode on and off. Remote command: on page 1348 ACQuire:SEGMented:STATe Number of acquisitions You can define the number of acquisitions to be stored in a fast segmentation acquisi- tion series: ●...
Page 136 ® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Acquire settings Enable automatic replay If enabled, the instrument starts processing and displaying the data when the acquisi- tion series is captured completely. Depending on the number of acquisitions, it can take some time until the acquisition series is displayed. If the setting is disabled, the instrument only captures the data and stores it in the sample memory.
Page 137 ® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Acquire settings Figure 5-5: Setting the instrument into high definition mode Enable Enables the higher digital resolution, up to 16 bit. Remote command: on page 1406 HDEFinition:STATe Bandwidth Sets the filter bandwidth for the high definition mode. The lower the filter bandwidth, the higher the resulting resolution.
Page 138 ® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Acquire settings Acquisition The active high definition mode is indicated in the "Acquisition" label, and the actual resolution is shown. The high definition mode works with half the real-time sample rate. For FFT, the instru- ment halves this sample rate again.
Page 139 ® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Acquire settings History Due to the 16-bit word length, the history depth is reduced, less waveforms are saved than in normal mode. Export In high definition mode, waveform data in raw format is exported to file with 16-bit word length, except for peak detect decimation (2 values with 8 bit).
Page 140 ® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Vertical setup See: ● "Raw (ADC direct)" on page 500 ● "Interleaved x/y" on page 501 ● "Byte order" on page 1251 If you use remote control commands to transfer data to a controlling computer, set the data format to INT,16 to transfer the complete data words (see FORMat[:DATA] on page 1301).
Page 141 ® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Vertical setup Figure 5-6: Signal path in the vertical system of R&S RTP 5.5.1 Setup settings Access: "Menu" > "Vertical" > "Setup" The "Setup" tab provides all basic vertical settings. The channels are listed in horizon- tal subtabs.
Page 142 ® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Vertical setup Scale Defines the vertical scale in Volts per division. Increasing the scale compresses the display of the signal. Remote command: on page 1350 CHANnel<ch>:SCALe Offset The offset voltage is subtracted to correct a signal with DC offset. The vertical center of the selected channel is shifted by the offset value and the signal is repositioned within the diagram area.
Page 143 ® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Vertical setup Invert channel Turns the inversion of the signal amplitude on or off. To invert means to reflect the volt- age values of all signal components against the ground level. If the inverted channel is the trigger source, the instrument triggers on the inverted signal.
Page 144 ® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Vertical setup The specified bandwidth indicates the range of frequencies that the instrument can acquire and display accurately with less than 3dB attenuation. The probe has also a limited bandwidth and thus affects the resulting system bandwidth. At full bandwidth, all frequencies in the specified range are acquired and displayed.
Page 145 ® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Vertical setup External attenuation: Scale, Attenuation Consider a voltage divider that is part of the DUT before the measuring point. The external attenuation is included in the measurement, and the instrument shows the results that would be measured before the divider. External attenuation can be used with all probes.
Page 146 ® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Vertical setup Channel coupling affects all vertical settings that are adjusted in the "Settings" tab: ver- tical scale, position, offset, coupling, and ground. Remote command: on page 1353 CHANnel<ch>:CPLing 5.5.5 Digital filter setup Access: "Menu" > "Vertical" > "Bandwidth" tab > "Digital Filter" After processing by the A/D converter, the channel and trigger signals are digitized sig- nals.
Page 147 ® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Probes 5.6 Probes With R&S RTP digital oscilloscopes, you can use various probe types. Mostly these probes are passive and active voltage probes. The "Probes" dialog provides all probe- relevant information. The instrument can detect many probes and read out the probe-specific parameters, for example, bandwidth and attenuation.
Page 148 ® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Probes An external attenuation can be set on the "Other" tab, see "External attenuation: Scale, Attenuation" on page 145. The shared probe settings are: Type, Name, Bandwidth....................148 Detect AutoZero, Use AutoZero..................148 Type, Name, Bandwidth The fields show the characteristics of a recognized or predefined probe for information.
Page 149 ® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Probes To correct the zero error of voltage probes, short the signal pin and the ground pin together and connect them to the ground of the DUT. Then tap "Detect AutoZero". While the alignment is running, the instrument switches to DC coupling to display the waveform correctly.
Page 150 ® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Probes Probe unit, Auto attenuation If the probe is recognized by the R&S RTP, the instrument reads the attenuation unit and value from the probe an displays them. Remote command: on page 1358 PROBe<ch>:SETup:ATTenuation[:AUTO]? Micro button action Active voltage probes with Rohde &...
Page 151 ® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Probes "Probe mode" Only available if a R&S RT‑ZM modular probe is connected. Sets the measurement mode of the modular probe. See also "Probe mode" on page 161. "Probe Setup" Opens the "Probes Setup" dialog box. Remote command: on page 1360 PROBe<ch>:SETup:MODE...
Page 152 ® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Probes – "Single Ended Pos/Neg": Measures the voltage between the positive/negative signal socket and the ground. The ProbeMeter always measures the common mode and differential voltages. Single-ended voltages are calculated values: + 0.5 * V and V - 0.5 * V Remote command:...
Page 153 ® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Probes Figure 5-7: Probe setup for passive probe The following shared probe settings are available: ● "Type, Name, Bandwidth" on page 148 ● "Detect AutoZero, Use AutoZero" on page 148 If a passive probe is connected, the probe attenuation is read out and shown in the "Setup"...
Page 154 ® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Probes Vertical unit, Attenuation, Gain If a predefined probe is connected and selected, the attenuation or gain values are shown. For unknown probes and passive probes in manual mode, you can set user-defined values for unit, gain and attenuation. If AC coupling is set, the attenuation of passive probes has no effect, and voltage is applied to the instrument with factor 1:1.
Page 155 ® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Probes 5.6.4.1 R&S RT-ZS single-ended probes Figure 5-8: Probe setup for active single-ended probe R&S RT-ZS20 The only setting for R&S RT-ZS probes is the channel offset. See "Offset" on page 142. User Manual 1803.6484.02 ─ 08...
Page 156 ® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Probes 5.6.4.2 R&S RT-ZD differential probes Figure 5-9: Probe setup for active differential probe R&S RT-ZD40 The offset is the differential offset. See "Offset" on page 142. Specific settings for R&S RT-ZD probes are the following: CM offset Sets the common-mode offset to compensate for a common DC voltage applied to both input sockets (referenced to the ground socket).
Page 157 ® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Probes Remote command: on page 1366 PROBe<ch>:SETup:ZAXV 5.6.4.3 R&S RT‑ZPR power rail probes ‑ ZPR Figure 5-10: Probe setup for power rail probe R&S RT The offset is the channel offset. See "Offset" on page 142. If the ProbeMeter is active, an additional function is provided in the "ProbeMeter"...
Page 158 ® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Probes AC Coupling Enables AC coupling in the R&S RT‑ZPR power rail probes, which removes DC and very low-frequency components. The R&S RT‑ZPR probe requires 50 Ω input termina- tion, for which the channel AC coupling is not available. The probe setting allows AC coupling also at 50 Ω...
Page 159 ® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Probes Range Sets the voltage range of a R&S RT-ZHD probe. You can set the range on the probe control box or at the oscilloscope. "Auto" The voltage range is set only at the oscilloscope with "Vertical scale". "Low"...
Page 160 ® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Probes ● "ProbeMeter results" on page 151 ● Setup parameters of modular probes..............160 ● Deembedding for modular probes.................162 ● Termination voltage with R&S RT‑ZMA40 SMA module........163 5.6.5.1 Setup parameters of modular probes The basic setup parameters of all modular probes are the measurement mode and the offset settings.
Page 161 ® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Probes Probe mode Sets the measurement mode of modular probes. The modular probes of the R&S RT‑ZM family have a multimode function. You can switch between single-ended, differential and common mode measurements without reconnecting or resoldering the probe. You can set the probe mode in the dialog box, and you can assign the probe mode setting to the micro button.
Page 162 ® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Probes 5.6.5.2 Deembedding for modular probes Deembedding removes the parasitic effects of the measurement setup from the mea- sured signal. These effects are typically increased when the signal frequency increa- ses. Thus, deembedding is useful or even necessary when measuring signals of 4 GHz frequency or higher.
Page 163 ® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Probes Remote command: on page 1375 PROBe<ch>:DEEMbedding:MODE on page 2599 DEEMbedding<de>:COMPonent<n>:MODE Effective bandwidth Sets the maximum bandwidth for probe deembedding until which the signal is correc- ted. This maximum value is the minimum bandwidth value of the probe bandwidth, tip module bandwidth, and oscilloscope bandwidth.
Page 164 ® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Probes SMA module using the red DC lead (see R&S RT‑ZM User Manual). The required ter- mination voltage is measured and adjusted automatically, but can also be set manually. Access: "Menu" > "Vertical" > "Probes" > "Termination" Enable Activates control of the termination voltage.
Page 165 ® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Probes ● "Detect AutoZero, Use AutoZero" on page 148 The probe attenuation of the selected probe is also shown in the "Probes" tab: ● "Probe unit, Auto attenuation" on page 150 Figure 5-13: Probe setup for transmission line probe R&S RT-ZZ80 User Manual 1803.6484.02 ─...
Page 166 ® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Probes Figure 5-14: Probe setup for R&S RT-ZD01 User Manual 1803.6484.02 ─ 08...
Page 167 ® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Probes Figure 5-15: Probe setup for Newport optic receiver Specific settings for predefined probes are the following: Predefined probe......................167 Offset to mean......................168 Line impedance......................168 Conversion gain......................168 Wavelength......................... 168 Predefined probe List of probes that are known to the instrument. The instrument lists only probes that match the instrument coupling and, if connected, also the used adapter.
Page 168 ® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Probes Offset to mean Performs an automatic compensation for a DC component of the input signal using the result of a background mean measurement. The result is shown in "Offset". The func- tion is probe-independent and supports quick and convenient measurements of input signals with different DC offsets.
Page 169 ® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Probes be's User Manual for details. Make sure to demagnetize and adjust the probe before taking measurements. Figure 5-16: Probe setup for current probes R&S RT-ZC10 Current probes R&S RT-ZCxxB Current probes R&S RT-ZCxxB have a Rohde & Schwarz probe interface; they are powered and remotely controlled by the oscilloscope.
Page 170 ® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Probes Figure 5-17: Probe setup for current probes R&S RT-ZC20B For all current probes, attenuation or gain is shown in the "Setup" tab, and you can set the offset to mean: ● "Probe unit, Auto attenuation" on page 150 ●...
Page 171 ® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Probes Detect AutoZero If a current probe is connected, the function demagnetizes the probe's sensor head and sets the waveform to zero position to correct the error offset. Thus, it compensates for the remanence and offset caused by temperature drift. For R&S RT-ZCxxB probes, the determined "Zero adjust"...
Page 172 ® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Probes 5.6.8.1 Setup parameters of optical isolated probes Access: "Menu" > "Vertical" > "Probes" > select channel with connected R&S RT-ZISO probe. The following shared probe settings are available: ● "Type, Name, Bandwidth" on page 148 ●...
Page 173 ® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Probes Coupling Selects the coupling of the probe input. The termination of the channel input is always 50 Ω. The coupling determines the part of the signal that is used for waveform analysis and triggering.
Page 174 ® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Probes TIP Info Opens the "ZISO tip" dialog. See Section 5.6.8.2, "TIP Info dialog", on page 174. Info Opens the "Probes Info" dialog. See Section 5.6.10, "Probes info", on page 175. 5.6.8.2 TIP Info dialog Access: "Menu"...
Page 175 ® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Probes Figure 5-18: Probe setup for an unknown probe Set the unit and the attenuation or gain of the probe: "Vertical unit, Attenuation, Gain" on page 154. 5.6.10 Probes info 5.6.10.1 Probe attributes To check the attributes of the connected probes, select "Info" in the "Vertical" > "Probes"...
Page 176 ® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Probes Remote commands: ● on page 1382 PROBe<ch>:ID:SWVersion? ● on page 1382 PROBe<ch>:ID:PRDate? ● on page 1382 PROBe<ch>:ID:PARTnumber? ● on page 1382 PROBe<ch>:ID:SRNumber? ● on page 1383 PROBe<ch>:SETup:CAPacitance? ● on page 1383 PROBe<ch>:SETup:IMPedance? 5.6.10.2 Calibration results To check the attributes of the connected probes, select "Info"...
Page 177 ® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Probes 5.6.11 Probe adapter R&S RT‑Z1M Using the R&S RT‑Z1M probe adapter, you can connect probes requiring 1 MΩ load impedance to the R&S RTP, which has inputs with 50 Ω impedance. The Rohde & Schwarz probe interface at the adapter input allows you to connect various probes, e.g.
Page 178 ® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Probes Coupling Selects the coupling, which determines what part of the signal is used for waveform analysis and triggering. In addition to coupling, the signal can be filtered for high frequency rejection, see Sec- tion 5.5.5, "Digital filter setup", on page 146.
Page 179 ® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Probes ‑ Z1M adapter, R&S ProbeMeter of Figure 5-19: Probe settings of passive probe connected via R&S RT the adapter is available 5.6.11.3 R&S RT‑Z1M setup Access: "Menu" > "Vertical" > "Probes" > "Adapter Setup" In the "RT-Z1M"...
Page 180 ® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S R&S RT-ZVC probe Bandwidth limit Selects the bandwidth limit of the adapter. The specified bandwidth indicates the range of frequencies that the instrument can acquire and display accurately with less than 3dB attenuation. "Full" At full bandwidth, all frequencies in the specified range are acquired and displayed.
Page 181 ® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S R&S RT-ZVC probe For more information on the R&S RT-ZVC probe, see also its user manual. Source Channels You can simultaneously connect a R&S RT-ZVC and a R&S RT-ZL04 to the R&S RTP, but no parallel operation on screen is possible. You can acquire and measure the R&S RT-ZVC or R&S RT-ZL04 together with the analog input channels.
Page 182 ® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S R&S RT-ZVC probe Make sure that the tab of the correct probe is selected on the left side. State Enables the corresponding channel of the probe. The number of available channels depend on the characteristics of your multi-channel power probe. Remote command: on page 1395 ZVC:Z<m>:V<n>[:STATe]...
Page 183 ® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S R&S RT-ZVC probe For the voltmeter channels, the Scale, the Offset and the "Position" specify the operat- ing range of the voltmeter. Remote command: on page 1393 ZVC:Z<m>:V<n>:OFFSet on page 1387 ZVC:Z<m>:I<n>:OFFSet Setup Opens the voltage or current settings for the selected channel. See Section 5.7.2, "ZVC voltage settings",...
Page 184 ® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S R&S RT-ZVC probe Remote command: on page 1386 ZVC:BANDwidth Couple resolution Sets the resolution of all R&S RT-ZVC channels. "On" The resolution of the analog channels is applied to R&S RT-ZVC channels. The signal is automatically interpolated or decimated to get the analog resolution.
Page 185 ® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S R&S RT-ZVC probe 5.7.1.3 Zero compensation Access: [Apps]> "Analysis" > "Multi-channel probe"> "ZeroComp" tab Zero compensation is used to avoid negative currents in measurement results, and to improve the measurement accuracy. The determined compensation is valid as long as the temperature is constant and the probe settings are unchanged.
Page 186 ® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S R&S RT-ZVC probe Channel Selects the voltmeter channel to be configured. State Enables the corresponding voltage channel of the probe. The number of available channels depend on the characteristics of your multi-channel power probe. Remote command: on page 1395 ZVC:Z<m>:V<n>[:STATe]...
Page 187 ® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S R&S RT-ZVC probe Remote command: on page 1394 ZVC:Z<m>:V<n>:SKEW Reset Overload Resets the overload indication at the probe. Remote command: on page 1393 ZVC:Z<m>:V<n>:OVERload:RSTO 5.7.3 ZVC current settings Access: [Apps]> "Analysis" > "Multi-channel probe"> "Setup" tab > "Setup" icon of cur- rent channel See also: ●...
Page 188 ® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S R&S RT-ZVC probe Remote command: on page 1392 ZVC:Z<m>:I<n>[:STATe] Bandwidth Displays the bandwidth of the current channel. You can set the probe bandwidth in the "Setup" dialog. Remote command: on page 1386 ZVC:Z<m>:I<n>:BANDwidth? Position Moves the selected signal up or down in the diagram.
Page 189 ® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S R&S RT-ZVC probe Max current / shunt ← Internal Shunt Mode Selects the maximum current and the internal shunt value. With the maximum current and the internal shunt selection, the operating range of the amperemeter is specified.
Page 190 ® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Differential signals 5.8 Differential signals With R&S RTP, you can easily analyze differential signals using single-ended probes, or even cables. The instrument processes the input of single-ended probes on analog channels and creates the differential and common mode waveforms. Similar to Rohde &...
Page 191 ® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Differential signals Figure 5-21: Setup of deembedded differential signals Enable Activates the differential signal. Remote command: on page 1399 DIFFerential<m>:STATe P, N Select the analog input channel of the positive and negative signal. Remote command: on page 1400 DIFFerential<m>:PSIGnal[:SELect] on page 1400...
Page 192 ® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Differential signals ● Real-time deembedding: 1 output waveform. It can either be the deembedded dif- ferential, common-mode, positive single-ended or negative single-ended wave- form. In the diagram, you see the output waveforms, and the signal icons of the input chan- nels are grayed out.
Page 193 ® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Differential signals Scale coupling If enabled, the vertical scales of P, N, differential and common mode waveforms are coupled. The scales are related as follows: VertScale = VertScale = VertScale = VertScale Diff You can disable the scale coupling and set an individual scale for each waveform. Remote command: on page 1401 DIFFerential<m>:COUPling...
Page 194 ® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Setting up the waveform 9. If necessary, activate "Use skew offset". Use the deskewing if the P and N wave- forms are not correctly aligned. When you disable a deembedded differential signal in "Vertical" > "Differential Signals", deembedding is also disabled.
Page 195 ® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Setting up the waveform 5.9.1 Adjusting passive probes When using a passive probe, you have to compensate it when you connect it to the instrument the first time. Compensation matches the probe cable capacitance to the oscilloscope input capacitance to assure good amplitude accuracy from DC to upper bandwidth limit frequencies.
Page 196 ® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Setting up the waveform 2. Open "Menu" > "Horizontal" > "Setup" tab. 3. Set the "Time scale". 4. If you want to analyze the signal some time before or after the trigger, use the "Position"...
Page 197 ® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Setting up the waveform If "Envelope" or "Average" is selected in the "Acquisition" tab, one acquisition means a cycle containing as many acquired waveforms as required to satisfy the reset conditions. Prerequisites: ● Probes are connected. ●...
Page 198 ® Acquisition and waveform setup R&S Setting up the waveform 4. Set the "Start roll time", the acquisition time at which the instrument starts the roll mode. 5.9.7 Using fast segmentation Fast Segmentation reduces the dead time between two waveform acquisition cycles. The settings are described in Section 5.4.3, "Segmented settings",...
Page 199 ® Triggers R&S Basics of triggering 6 Triggers 6.1 Basics of triggering Triggering means to capture the interesting part of the relevant waveforms. Choosing the right trigger type and configuring all trigger settings correctly allows you to detect various incidents in analog, digital, and protocol signals. Trigger A trigger occurs if the complete set of trigger conditions is fulfilled.
Page 200 ® Triggers R&S Setting up the trigger Trigger information Information on the most important trigger settings is shown in the trigger label on top of the signal bar. If you double-tap the trigger label, the "Trigger" dialog box opens. The label shows: ●...
Page 201 ® Triggers R&S Setting up the trigger 6.2.2 Positioning the trigger By positioning the trigger on the time axis, you define which part of the waveform is displayed: mainly the pre-trigger part, or the post-trigger part, or the part around the trigger point.
Page 202 ® Triggers R&S Trigger types 6. Optionally, set the "After 1st event wait" that the instrument waits after an A-trigger until it recognizes B-triggers. 7. Set the "2nd event count". The last B-trigger causes the trigger. 8. You can also define a reset condition. If no B-trigger occurs and the reset condition is fulfilled, the sequence restarts with the A-trigger.
Page 203 ® Triggers R&S Trigger types ● Basic trigger settings.....................203 ● Edge........................205 ● Glitch........................206 ● Width........................207 ● Runt........................208 ● Window......................... 210 ● Timeout......................... 212 ● Interval........................213 ● Slew rate....................... 214 ● Setup & Hold......................216 ● State........................218 ● Pattern........................219 ● Serial pattern......................222 ●...
Page 204 ® Triggers R&S Trigger types Source Selects the source of the trigger signal for the current trigger condition. The trigger source works even if it is not displayed in a diagram. It must be synchronized to the signal to be displayed and analyzed. The trigger source can be: ●...
Page 205 ® Triggers R&S Trigger types Remote command: on page 1410 TRIGger<t>:TYPE Find level Sets the trigger level automatically to 0.5 * (MaxPeak – MinPeak). The function is not available for an external trigger source and the TV trigger. Remote command: on page 1411 TRIGger<t>:FINDlevel 6.3.2 Edge...
Page 206 ® Triggers R&S Trigger types Level Sets the voltage level for the trigger condition. You can also drag the trigger level marker on the display (TA or TB on the right edge of the display). Remote command: on page 1410 TRIGger<t>:LEVel<n>[:VALue] 6.3.3 Glitch Access: "Menu"...
Page 207 ® Triggers R&S Trigger types You need to know the expected pulse widths of the circuit to set the glitch width cor- rectly. Remote command: on page 1413 TRIGger<t>:GLITch:WIDTh Trigger level Sets the voltage level for the trigger condition. You can also drag the trigger level marker on the display (TA or TB on the right edge of the display).
Page 208 ® Triggers R&S Trigger types "Positive" Triggers on positive-going pulses. "Negative" Triggers on negative-going pulses. Remote command: on page 1413 TRIGger<t>:WIDTh:POLarity Range Selects how the range of a pulse width is defined: "Within" Triggers on pulses inside a given range. The range of the pulse width is defined by "±Delta"...
Page 209 ® Triggers R&S Trigger types threshold amplitudes, you can define a time limit for the runt in the same way as for width triggers. For example, this trigger can detect logic, digital, and analog signals remaining below a specified threshold amplitude because I/O ports are in an undefined state.
Page 210 ® Triggers R&S Trigger types "Longer" Triggers on runts longer than the given "Runt width". "Shorter" Triggers on runts shorter than the given "Runt width". "Within" Triggers if the runt length is inside a given time range. The range is defined by "Runt width"...
Page 211 ® Triggers R&S Trigger types Vertical condition Selects how the signal run is compared with the window: "Enter" Triggers when the signal crosses the upper or lower level and thus enters the window made up of these two levels. "Exit" Triggers when the signal leaves the window.
Page 212 ® Triggers R&S Trigger types "Outside" "Outside" is the opposite definition of "Within". The instrument triggers if the signal stays inside or outside the vertical window limits for a time shorter than Width - Delta or longer than Width + Delta. "Shorter"...
Page 213 ® Triggers R&S Trigger types Trigger level Sets the voltage level for the trigger condition. You can also drag the trigger level marker on the display (TA or TB on the right edge of the display). The range of the trig- ger level is limited in a way so that always a hysteresis for stable trigger conditions is available.
Page 214 ® Triggers R&S Trigger types Slope Sets the edge for the trigger. You can analyze the interval between positive edges or between negative edges. Remote command: on page 1421 TRIGger<t>:INTerval:SLOPe Trigger level Sets the voltage level for the trigger condition. You can also drag the trigger level marker on the display (TA or TB on the right edge of the display).
Page 215 ® Triggers R&S Trigger types Slope Sets the edge type for the trigger condition. "Positive" Selects the rising edge, which is a positive voltage change. "Negative" Selects the falling edge, which is a negative voltage change. "Both" Selects the rising as well as the falling edge. This option is not availa- ble if the trigger source is the external trigger input.
Page 216 ® Triggers R&S Trigger types "Within" Triggers on slew rates inside a given time range. The range is defined by "Slew rate" and "±Delta". "Outside" Triggers on slew rates outside a given time range. The range defini- tion is the same as for "Within" range. "Shorter"...
Page 217 ® Triggers R&S Trigger types Clock source Selects the input channel of the clock signal. Remote command: on page 1426 TRIGger<t>:SETHold:CSOurce[:VALue] Clock edge Sets the edge of the clock signal to define the time reference point for the setup and hold time: "Positive"...
Page 218 ® Triggers R&S Trigger types Use data level for clock level Sets the trigger levels and hysteresis values for all channels to the values of the cur- rently selected trigger source. The function affects only the levels defined for the selected condition.
Page 219 ® Triggers R&S Trigger types The individual settings are: ● "Slope" on page 205 ● "Pattern" on page 220 ● "Trigger Levels" on page 221 ● "Find level" on page 205 ● "Use data level for clock level" on page 218 6.3.12 Pattern Access: "Menu"...
Page 220 ® Triggers R&S Trigger types Pattern The pattern contains the channel selection, and the logical operations structure of hardware-based Boolean logic. Channel "On", Select the channels to be considered. For qualification, you can select all channel signals except for the trigger source. In pattern trig- "Off"...
Page 221 ® Triggers R&S Trigger types Logic opera- Defines the logic combination of two sources. The sources are chan- tors nel 1/2 and channel 3/4 on the first step, and in the second step the logical combination resulting from the first step. ●...
Page 222 ® Triggers R&S Trigger types on page 1431 TRIGger<t>:PATTern:WIDTh:DELTa on page 1430 TRIGger<t>:PATTern:WIDTh:RANGe on page 1430 TRIGger<t>:PATTern:WIDTh[:WIDTh] 6.3.13 Serial pattern Serial pattern is available, if option R&S RTP-K140/K141 is installed. Section 6.10, "High speed serial pattern trigger (option R&S RTP-K140/K141)", on page 247.
Page 223 ® Triggers R&S Trigger types Most video signals have an output impedance of 75 Ω. The channel inputs of the R&S RTP have an input impedance of 50 Ω. Make sure to provide the adequate matching to ensure amplitude fidelity. Using the R&S RT‑Z1M adapter and a simple 75 Ω...
Page 224 ® Triggers R&S Trigger types Mode Selects the lines or fields on which the instrument triggers. Available modes depend on the scanning system of the selected standard. "All fields" Triggers on the first video line of the frame (progressive scanning) or field (interlaced scanning), for example, to find amplitude differences between the fields.
Page 225 ® Triggers R&S Trigger types Figure 6-2: Signal with positive polarity and tri-level sync pulse Remote command: on page 1457 TRIGger<t>:TV:POLarity Pulse type Sets the type of the sync pulse, either bi-level sync pulse (used in SDTV signals), or tri- level sync pulse (used in HDTV signals).
Page 226 ® Triggers R&S Trigger types Pulse width This setting is available for user-defined video signals if "Standard" is set to "Custom". Remote command: on page 1460 TRIGger<t>:TV:CUSTom:SDURation Scan Sets the scanning system. This setting is available for user-defined video signals if "Standard" is set to "Custom". "Interlaced"...
Page 227 ® Triggers R&S Trigger types Hardware CDR is a continuous process, the recovered clock is always synchronized. HW CDR is the best way to analyze the jitter and eyes of continuous signals, and of buses that use Spread Spectrum Clocking. The complete data can be used, there is no synchronization time needed as with SW CDR, and no data must be discarded.
Page 228 ® Triggers R&S Trigger types User Manual 1803.6484.02 ─ 08...
Page 229 ® Triggers R&S Trigger types Figure 6-4: Hardware CDR for PAM-N signals (option R&S RTP-K135) Source Displays the channel signal that is used for clock recovery. The source cannot be changed if the CDR trigger is selected in the trigger setup. In this case, the instrument triggers on the recovered clock;...
Page 230 ® Triggers R&S Trigger types Serial standard Displays the currently selected source settings. You can set this up additionally to the "Serial standard" and the "PAM order" in the "Menu" > "Apps" > "Analysis" > "Signal Configuration" dialog. Preset serial standard Presets the settings of the hardware CDR to the serial standard selected for the source.
Page 231 ® Triggers R&S Mode / Holdoff "Feed forward" The feed-forward algorithm is a mathematical optimization method used for clock data recovery. To set up the algorithm, set the band- width and the relative bandwidth. Remote command: on page 1451 TRIGger<t>:CDR:EYE:ALGorithm Algorithm settings Define the bandwidth settings for "Algorithm"...
Page 232 ® Triggers R&S Mode / Holdoff [Run / Stop]/[Single] Front panel keys to start and stop a continuous acquisition or a defined number of acquisition cycles, respectively. The number of acquisitions is set with "Average count". Remote command: on page 1336 on page 1337 SINGle on page 1337...
Page 233 ® Triggers R&S Mode / Holdoff Force Trigger If the acquisition is running in normal mode and no valid trigger occurs, forcing the trig- ger provokes an immediate single acquisition. Thus you can confirm that a signal is available and use the waveform display to determine how to trigger on it. If you need this function frequently, you can add the "Force Trigger"...
Page 234 ® Triggers R&S Conditioning on page 1467 TRIGger<t>:HOLDoff:MAX on page 1466 TRIGger<t>:HOLDoff:MIN on page 1467 TRIGger<t>:HOLDoff:AUTotime? on page 1468 TRIGger<t>:HOLDoff:SCALing 6.5 Conditioning The rejection of noise by setting a hysteresis avoids unwanted trigger events caused by noise oscillation around the trigger level. You can select the hysteresis mode and value for each channel separately, or couple the trigger levels and set the same hysteresis for channels.
Page 235 ® Triggers R&S Actions on trigger Remote command: on page 1468 TRIGger<t>:LEVel<n>:NOISe[:STATe] Size mode Selects whether the hysteresis is defined in absolute or relative values. The setting is available only in manual hysteresis mode. Remote command: on page 1469 TRIGger<t>:LEVel<n>:NOISe:MODE Absolute hysteresis Defines a range in absolute values around the trigger level.
Page 236 ® Triggers R&S Actions on trigger Actions on trigger The trigger can initiate several actions, each time a trigger occurs. To activate an action, set it to "On trigger". The following actions are available: "Beep" Generates a beep sound. "Save screen- Saves a screenshot according to settings in "Menu"...
Page 237 ® Triggers R&S Qualification "Save results" Starts the export of selected results to file. Tap "Select results" to choose the results for export from a list of available results. The R&S RTP can export cursor results, measurement results, mask test results, search results, decode results of serial protocols, advanced jitter/noise results.
Page 238 ® Triggers R&S Qualification By qualifying a trigger event, you can logically combine the trigger signal with the state of other analog channel signals. The instrument triggers if both of the following apply: ● The basic conditions of the trigger event definition are fulfilled. ●...
Page 239 ® Triggers R&S Qualification Qualification is available for many trigger types: Edge, glitch, width, runt, window, time- out, and interval. Qualification is not possible for the R-event. See also: Section 6.7, "Qualification", on page 237. Pattern The pattern contains the channel selection, and the logical operations structure of hardware-based Boolean logic.
Page 240 ® Triggers R&S Sequence on page 1463 TRIGger<t>:QUALify<n>:D:LOGic Logic operators: on page 1463 TRIGger<t>:QUALify<n>:AB:LOGic on page 1463 TRIGger<t>:QUALify<n>:CD:LOGic on page 1463 TRIGger<t>:QUALify<n>:ABCD:LOGic Trigger Levels Define the trigger level for each input channel. For state and pattern trigger, the trigger level is a decision threshold: If the signal value is higher than the trigger level, the sig- nal state is high (1 or true for the Boolean logic).
Page 241 ® Triggers R&S Sequence All trigger sequences require that input channels CH1...4 are set as trigger sources for all conditions. All other input sources are disabled. Trigger sequences are not available if one the following trigger types is set as A-trigger: ●...
Page 242 ® Triggers R&S Sequence The reset condition R can be a timeout or a trigger condition, or a combination of both. Sequence Selects the type of the sequence. "A → B → R" Triggers if all conditions of A- and B-events, as well as additional delay and reset timeout or R-event (reset) conditions are fulfilled.
Page 243 ® Triggers R&S Zone trigger Reset on event/Reset event If enabled, the trigger sequence is restarted by the R-trigger condition if the specified number of B-triggers does not occur before the trigger conditions are fulfilled. The R-trigger condition is configured in the same way as the A-trigger. The instrument disables settings that do not fit the previous settings in the sequence.
Page 244 ® Triggers R&S Zone trigger To document the trigger events, use the actions on trigger. For example, create a report when the instrument triggers, or save the waveform. Zone trigger is not available for serial protocol triggers. Trigger sequence with zone trigger You can combine the zone trigger with common trigger conditions and use one of the following trigger sequences: ●...
Page 245 ® Triggers R&S Zone trigger 6.9.2 Creating trigger zones You can define the trigger zones on the display, or use existing mask definitions as trig- ger zones. Define trigger zones 1. Tap the "Zone trigger" icon on the toolbar. 2. In the signal bar, select if the signal must violate the zone to cause a trigger (must intersect), or vice versa (must not intersect).
Page 246 ® Triggers R&S Zone trigger Combine Sets the logic combination of two zones. Use selected mask Includes the selected zone or mask in the zone expression. Clear Expr Deletes the zone trigger expression. The zones are not deleted, they remain as usual masks, and the result boxes of the mask test appear.
Page 247 ® Triggers R&S High speed serial pattern trigger (option R&S RTP-K140/K141) Apply zone trigger to history Applies the zone trigger condition to the acquisitions in the history memory. The history saves all acquisitions that fulfill the trigger condition that is set during acqui- sition (zone trigger condition, or another trigger condition).
Page 248 ® Triggers R&S High speed serial pattern trigger (option R&S RTP-K140/K141) With enabled CDR, the timing information is embedded in the data. The signal is extracted, resulting in a clock signal that can be further processed by the trigger sys- tem.
Page 249 ® Triggers R&S High speed serial pattern trigger (option R&S RTP-K140/K141) Instruments Number of active Maximum acquisition mode Maximum nominal bit rate bandwidth channels R&S RTP- R&S RTP- K140 K141 2 channels: 20 GSa/s 8 Gbit/s CH1 and CH2 or CH3 and CH4 3 or 4 channels 20 GSa/s...
Page 250 ® Triggers R&S High speed serial pattern trigger (option R&S RTP-K140/K141) 6.10.2.1 General settings for serial pattern trigger In the basic serial pattern settings, you can define the clock signal in relation to which you want to trigger. You can use the recovered clock signal for the serial pattern trigger ("CDR"...
Page 251 ® Triggers R&S High speed serial pattern trigger (option R&S RTP-K140/K141) Use data level for clock level ← Explicit clock Sets the trigger levels and hysteresis values for all channels to the values of the cur- rently selected trigger source. The function affects only the levels defined for the selected condition.
Page 252 ® Triggers R&S High speed serial pattern trigger (option R&S RTP-K140/K141) Remote command: on page 1410 TRIGger<t>:LEVel<n>[:VALue] Sampling time ← Hardware CDR Defines the position of the last bit of the bit pattern to be triggered on, relative to the trigger time.
Page 253 ® Triggers R&S High speed serial pattern trigger (option R&S RTP-K140/K141) Bit pattern length, Bit pattern length A, Bit pattern length B Sets the length of the bit pattern. You can select a value of up to 160 bits. Remote command: on page 1437 TRIGger<t>:SERPattern:BITPattern:PTALength on page 1438...
Page 254 ® Triggers R&S High speed serial pattern trigger (option R&S RTP-K140/K141) 6.10.2.3 Complex word pattern Within the pattern type "Complex word pattern", a total of four different pattern condi- tions can be triggered on within a data stream. First, aligning to a frame id in form of bit pattern (or timeout) has to be done.
Page 255 ® Triggers R&S High speed serial pattern trigger (option R&S RTP-K140/K141) Type ← Frame Id Selects if the alignment is done on a pattern value or on a defined timeout. Remote command: on page 1439 TRIGger<t>:SERPattern:COMPlex:SOFState Length ← Frame Id Sets the length of the pattern for the trigger alignment condition.
Page 256 ® Triggers R&S High speed serial pattern trigger (option R&S RTP-K140/K141) Pattern length Sets the word pattern length in bits. The maximum bit length of all selected pattern conditions is 160 bits, with arbitrary bits (e.g., due to bit offsets) not counted. Remote command: on page 1441 TRIGger<t>:SERPattern:COMPlex:PATTern<n>:PATLength...
Page 257 ® Triggers R&S High speed serial pattern trigger (option R&S RTP-K140/K141) PRBS Sequence Selects a predefined pseudo random binary sequence. Available are the following sequences: ● PRBS-7 ● PRBS-9 ● PRBS-11 ● PRBS-15 ● PRBS-16 ● PRBS-17 ● PRBS-20 ● PRBS-23 ●...
Page 258 ® Triggers R&S High speed serial pattern trigger (option R&S RTP-K140/K141) Alignment Selects one of the comma control symbols (K28.1, K28.5, K28.7) used for synchroniza- tion. Remote command: on page 1444 TRIGger<t>:SERPattern:EBTB:ALIGnment Scramble Selects if the data is scrambled or unscrambled. Remote command: on page 1447 TRIGger<t>:SERPattern:EBTB:SCRMble...
Page 259 ® Triggers R&S High speed serial pattern trigger (option R&S RTP-K140/K141) Remote command: on page 1447 TRIGger<t>:SERPattern:EBTB:SYMBols<n>:KDSYmbol on page 1447 TRIGger<t>:SERPattern:EBTB:SYMBols<n>:EBIT on page 1446 TRIGger<t>:SERPattern:EBTB:SYMBols<n>:DMINus? on page 1446 TRIGger<t>:SERPattern:EBTB:SYMBols<n>:DPLus? on page 1444 TRIGger<t>:SERPattern:EBTB:APPend on page 1445 TRIGger<t>:SERPattern:EBTB:COUNt? on page 1445 TRIGger<t>:SERPattern:EBTB:CLEar Disparity error Enables triggering on violation of the disparity condition.
Page 260 ® Triggers R&S High speed serial pattern trigger (option R&S RTP-K140/K141) Skip start Sets the skip start value. It is used to compensate for different bit rates between two communicating ports. Remote command: on page 1449 TRIGger<t>:SERPattern:I32B:SSTR on page 1451 TRIGger<t>:SERPattern:I30B:SSTR Skip end Sets the skip end symbol.
Page 261 ® Triggers R&S External trigger input a) Select the "Clock / CDR" respective to your reference clock signal. b) For "Clock / CDR" = "Clock" define the hardware clock in the "Hardware CDR" dialog. c) For "Clock / CDR" = "CDR" define the explicit clock in the "Explicit clock" dia- log.
Page 262 ® Triggers R&S External trigger input use all Rohde & Schwarz probes to connect the external trigger signal. The only trigger type to trigger on external signals is the edge trigger. 1. Connect the external trigger signal to the external trigger input. 2.
Page 263 ® Triggers R&S External trigger input Ground If the selected trigger source is the external trigger input, you can connect the trigger input to the ground. Remote command: on page 1481 TRIGger<t>:ANEDge:GND Coupling The external trigger input is a direct connection with 50 Ω termination, which passes both DC and AC components of the trigger signal.
Page 264 ® Triggers R&S External trigger input Slope Sets the edge type for the trigger condition. "Positive" Selects the rising edge, which is a positive voltage change. "Negative" Selects the falling edge, which is a negative voltage change. "Both" Selects the rising as well as the falling edge. This option is not availa- ble if the trigger source is the external trigger input.
Page 265 ® Triggers R&S External trigger input Remote commands: ● on page 1482 TRIGger<m>:EXTern:OVERload ● on page 1382 TRPRobe:ID:PARTnumber? ● on page 1356 TRPRobe:SETup:STATe? ● on page 1357 TRPRobe:SETup:TYPE? ● on page 1376 TRPRobe:SETup:ATTenuation:DEFProbe ● on page 1365 TRPRobe:SETup:ATTenuation:MANual ● on page 1364 TRPRobe:SETup:ATTenuation:MODE ●...
Page 266 ® Waveform analysis R&S Zoom 7 Waveform analysis This chapter describes general methods to check and analyze waveforms. These are: ● Zoom........................266 ● Reference waveforms................... 276 ● Mathematics......................284 ● History........................306 ● XY-diagram......................312 7.1 Zoom The zoom functions allow you to magnify a specific section of the diagram in order to view more details.
Page 267 ® Waveform analysis R&S Zoom Figure 7-1: Numeric zoom using start and stop values – Specifying the x- and y-position of the centerpoint of the area plus a range for the x- and y-axes; the area defined by that centerpoint and the ranges is zoomed.
Page 268 ® Waveform analysis R&S Zoom 7.1.2 Zoom settings The zoom area, i.e. the section to be enlarged, can be defined using two different methods: ● Using the zoom functions on the toolbar and draw the zoom area on the touch- screen ●...
Page 269 ® Waveform analysis R&S Zoom The "Zoom" tab allows you to specify start and stop values for the x- and y-axes. The acquired data within these ranges is zoomed. Additionally, you can enable a "Zoom Overlay" in the "Menu" > "Settings" > "Appear- ance"...
Page 270 ® Waveform analysis R&S Zoom X start ← Start/Stop Defines the lower limit of the zoom area on the x-axis. Remote command: on page 1486 LAYout:ZOOM:HORZ:ABSolute:STARt on page 1487 LAYout:ZOOM:HORZ:RELative:STARt X stop ← Start/Stop Defines the upper limit of the zoom area on the x-axis. Remote command: on page 1486 LAYout:ZOOM:HORZ:ABSolute:STOP...
Page 271 ® Waveform analysis R&S Zoom X range ← Position/Range Defines the width of the zoom area. Remote command: on page 1485 LAYout:ZOOM:HORZ:ABSolute:SPAN on page 1487 LAYout:ZOOM:HORZ:RELative:SPAN on page 1705 SEARch:RESDiagram:HORZ:ABSolute:SPAN on page 1706 SEARch:RESDiagram:HORZ:RELative:SPAN Y position ← Position/Range Defines the y-value of the centerpoint of the zoom area. Remote command: on page 1489 LAYout:ZOOM:VERTical:ABSolute:POSition...
Page 272 ® Waveform analysis R&S Zoom 7.1.3 Zooming for details The usage of the various zoom methods is described in the following procedures: ● To define the zoom area graphically on the touchscreen ● To define the zoom area numerically using start/stop values ●...
Page 273 ® Waveform analysis R&S Zoom Figure 7-3: Zoom diagram and overview diagram 3. If the position of the zoom area is not correct, drag the rectangle in the overview to the correct position. 4. If the size of the zoom area is not yet ideal, tap the rectangle in the overview dia- gram.
Page 274 ® Waveform analysis R&S Zoom 5. Select the "Y mode" to define "Absolute" or "Relative" y-axis values. 6. Define the "Y start" and "Y stop" values that define the lower and upper borders (respectively) of the zoom area on the y-axis. When you close the dialog box, the specified area is magnified in a new zoom dia- gram.
Page 275 ® Waveform analysis R&S Zoom An additional zoom diagram is displayed for the new zoom area, and another rect- angle in the original diagram indicates the new zoom area. Each rectangle in the overview has the same color as the corresponding zoom diagram frame. 7.
Page 276 ® Waveform analysis R&S Reference waveforms If you move one of the coupled zoom areas in the diagram, all other coupled zooms are moved as well, and their distance is kept unchanged. To use the hardware zoom In contrast to the normal zoom, the hardware zoom changes the instrument settings - horizontal and vertical scales, and also the trigger level and offset.
Page 277 ® Waveform analysis R&S Reference waveforms 2. Tap the icon. The overlay menu opens. 3. Set "Update" to the reference waveform to be used. 4. Tap the waveform to be used as reference waveform. To display a reference waveform 1. In the "Menu" > "Apps" > "Analysis" tab, select "Reference Curve". Alternatively, press the [Ref] key.
Page 278 ® Waveform analysis R&S Reference waveforms 4. Select the file format. Note: Reference waveforms can be loaded only from BIN files. XML and CSV for- mats are meant for further processing in other applications. 5. To save the waveform to the currently selected file, tap "Save". By default, the pre- fix for reference waveform files is "RefCurve".
Page 279 ® Waveform analysis R&S Reference waveforms In the "Setup" tab, you select the reference waveform and its source. The source can be an active waveform - trace of an input channel, math waveform or another refer- ence waveform - or a stored waveform. R1/2/3/4........................279 Show...........................
Page 280 ® Waveform analysis R&S Reference waveforms Update Copies the selected source waveform with all its settings to the memory of the refer- ence waveform. If the acquisition is running, the reference waveform is a snapshot. Remote command: on page 1494 REFCurve<rc>:UPDate File Opens a file selection dialog box and loads the selected reference waveform file.
Page 281 ® Waveform analysis R&S Reference waveforms Restore Settings Resets the time scale and the reference point to the original values of the reference waveform. Remote command: on page 1495 REFCurve<rc>:RESTore 7.2.2.3 Vertical Access: [Ref] key > "Vertical" tab Mode Selects the type of vertical settings: "Coupled to Vertical position and scale of the source are used.
Page 282 ® Waveform analysis R&S Reference waveforms Remote command: on page 1495 REFCurve<rc>:VMODe Set to original Restores the original vertical settings of the reference waveform (vertical scale, posi- tion, and offset), if vertical scaling is set to "Independent". Remote command: on page 1497 REFCurve<rc>:TOORignal Scale Sets the vertical scale for the reference waveform, if vertical scaling is set to "Inde-...
Page 283 ® Waveform analysis R&S Reference waveforms Vertical Rescaling Stretching and offset change the display of the waveform independent of the vertical scale and position. Enable ← Vertical Rescaling If enabled, the vertical offset and factor are applied to the reference waveform. Remote command: on page 1497 REFCurve<rc>:RESCale:VERTical:STATe...
Page 284 ® Waveform analysis R&S Mathematics Remote command: on page 1499 REFCurve<rc>:RESCale:HORizontal:FACTor Position ← Horizontal Rescaling ← Vertical Rescaling Moves the waveform horizontally. Enter a value with a time unit suitable for the time scale of the diagram. Positive values shift the waveform to the right, negative values shift it to the left.
Page 285 ® Waveform analysis R&S Mathematics 1. Tap the "+ Math" signal activator in the signal bar. Alternatively, press the [Math] key. 2. Define the math expression for calculation in one of the following ways: ● Section 7.3.3.2, "Defining a formula in the Operator editor", on page 288 ●...
Page 286 ® Waveform analysis R&S Mathematics The settings for input of mathematical formulas are described in separate chapters: ● Section 7.3.3.1, "Settings in the Operator editor", on page 287 ● Section 7.3.5, "Filters", on page 297 ● Section 9.1.3, "FFT configuration settings", on page 413 ●...
Page 287 ® Waveform analysis R&S Mathematics 7.3.3 Operator editor In the Operator editor, you can define the most common mathematical formulas without knowing their correct syntax. Remote command: ● on page 1505 CALCulate:MATH<m>[:EXPRession][:DEFine] 7.3.3.1 Settings in the Operator editor Source 1 / 2.........................287 Type..........................
Page 288 ® Waveform analysis R&S Mathematics Note: If you require other operators not listed here, use the formula editor provided in the "Equation" tab. See: Section 7.3.4, "Equation", on page 289. Adds up the sources "+" "-" Subtracts source 2 from source 1. "x"...
Page 289 ® Waveform analysis R&S Mathematics 7.3.4 Equation In the Equation tab, you can enter complex formulas to define a math waveform. The formula editor helps to enter formulas easily with correct syntax, using a large selection of operators and signal sources. All formulas in the formula editor are linear regardless whether a [dB] is set or not.
Page 290 ® Waveform analysis R&S Mathematics Icon Description Usage/Comment, FormulaEditor expression Right bracket Enclose operands e / π Math. constants e: Euler number: 2.7182... Pi: 3.1415... Left square bracket Enclose unit V / A / Ω Units [<unit>] Right square bracket Enclose unit Exponentiation with base x x: base, a: exponent...
Page 291 ® Waveform analysis R&S Mathematics Table 7-3: Cursor keys Icon Description Usage/Comment, FormulaEditor expression |← Move cursor to beginning ← Move cursor 1 step to the left → Move cursor 1 step to the right →| Move cursor to end 7.3.4.2 Math functions: algebra Table 7-4: Algebra...
Page 292 ® Waveform analysis R&S Mathematics 7.3.4.4 Math functions: bit operations Table 7-6: Bit operations Icon Description Usage/Comment, FormulaEditor expression digitize Convert to 0 or 1 digitize(x) The function uses the middle reference level and the hysteresis, which are set in "Menu" > "Measure" > "Advanced"...
Page 293 ® Waveform analysis R&S Mathematics 7.3.4.7 Math functions: correlation Table 7-9: Correlation (More keys) Icon Description Usage/Comment, FormulaEdi- tor expression Cross-correlation function of two waveforms correlation(x1, x2, biased) Measures the similarity of two waveforms as a function correlation(x1, x2, unbiased) of a time-lag applied to one of them.
Page 294 ® Waveform analysis R&S Mathematics Equation 7-2: Unbiased correlation Mathematic background for auto correlation: Equation 7-3: Biased auto correlation Equation 7-4: Unbiased auto correlation The R&S RTP uses only the real part of the signal. 7.3.4.8 Math functions: filter and power Table 7-10: Filter and power (More keys) Icon Description...
Page 295 ® Waveform analysis R&S Mathematics Icon Description Usage, comment, FormulaEditor expression Characteristics of FIR filter gaussian or rectangle, see FIR filter Moving average Calculates a mean value of several adjacent sample points. The result is a smoothed waveform. The moving average uses the full data and can be used for non-peri- odic signals.
Page 296 ® Waveform analysis R&S Mathematics Math expression Description Step2FreqRespNormMag(x,points) Normalized magnitude of transfer function in fre- Where: quency domain ● x is the waveform (channel, math, reference) Example: ● points are the number of points in the resulting Step2FreqRespNormMag(Ch1,2000) math waveform (min. 1000 points) Step2FreqRespNormPhi(x,points,time offset) Normalized phase of transfer function in frequency Where:...
Page 297 ® Waveform analysis R&S Mathematics 4. Enter the math formula including all required signal sources and operators by selecting the corresponding keys in the editor. For details on the available keys, Section 7.3.4.1, "Formula editor", on page 289. 5. To insert a physical unit in the formula, proceed as follows: a) If necessary, insert a decimal prefix using the "M/k/µ"...
Page 298 ® Waveform analysis R&S Mathematics ● "Type": defines whether the FIR filter is a highpass, lowpass, or bandpass/band- stop (= "User defined") filter. ● "Cut-Off": sets the limit frequency for the highpass or lowpass FIR filter. ● "Characteristics": defines if the filter has a Gaussian or a rectangular shape. ●...
Page 299 ® Waveform analysis R&S Mathematics To create the CSV file, we recommend using the MATLAB Filter Design & Analysis tool. In the tool, enter the filter type, filter order and filter frequencies. Alternatively, you can create the filter and the CSV file with Python. Make sure to set the sample frequency in MATLAB or Python and the sample rate at the oscilloscope to the same value.
Page 300 ® Waveform analysis R&S Mathematics ● Path is a string containing the path and filename of the filter file. The file contains the comma-separated filter coefficients. ► For example, to set a bandpass on channel 1 with filter coefficients saved in the bandpass.csv file, enter: FIR(userdef,Ch1,"C:\Users\Public\Documents\Rohde-Schwarz\RTx\bandpass.csv") 7.3.6 Script (option R&S RTP-K39)
Page 301 ® Waveform analysis R&S Mathematics Working directory Opens a file explorer, where you select a folder to save result and temporary data. Debug output Shows information on errors and problems in the script. The debug output is also the console output of the script, e.g. print commands are displayed here. 7.3.6.2 Python scripts To create Python scripts that can run on R&S RTP, consider the following rules and...
Page 302 ® Waveform analysis R&S Mathematics "output" : { "domain" : "time", "unit" : "V", "verticalScale" : 0.08, "verticalOffset" : 0.01, Execute The execute part is called every time when a trigger occurs. The main functions in math scripts are: getInput(SignalSource.Cx) # e.g. SignalSource.C1 getOutput() getHorizontalSetting() # e.g.
Page 303 ® Waveform analysis R&S Mathematics Example: The script adds C1 and C2 and displays the result as math waveform M1. import ctypes as ct import array import numpy as np class addC1C2: def __init__(self): print('__init__ called') def setup(self): print('setup called') def execute(self): (type, view) = getInput(SignalSource.C1) ch1 = np.array(view.cast('f'), copy=False)
Page 304 ® Waveform analysis R&S Mathematics In this tab, you can find functions to set the vertical parameters of the math waveform. For FFT scale settings, see Section 9.1.4, "FFT scale settings", on page 422. Vertical scale mode (Manual/Auto) By default, the vertical scale is adapted to the current measurement results automati- cally to provide an optimal display.
Page 305 ® Waveform analysis R&S Mathematics In this tab you can specify the waveform arithmetic for the math waveforms. Mode Waveform arithmetic builds the resulting waveform from several consecutive acquisi- tions and subsequent math calculations of the signal. For details, see "Arithmetic"...
Page 306 ® Waveform analysis R&S History ● It sets the number of acquisitions to be acquired in a fast segmentation acquisition series. Thus, you can acquire exactly one fast segmentation acquisition series with [Single]. If fast segmentation is enabled and configured to acquire the maximum number of acquisitions, the acquisition count is set to that maximum number and cannot be changed.
Page 307 ® Waveform analysis R&S History Total memory 10 history waveforms 4 waveforms acquired 4 history waveforms History memory at time = t Discarded earlier waveforms 12 waveforms acquired 10 history waveforms History memory at time = t Figure 7-5: History memory. In this example, the memory can store 10 waveforms. You can work with history waveforms in the same way as with the waveform of the lat- est acquisition: use zoom, cursor measurements, and automatic measurements, create math waveforms, perform mask testing and so on.
Page 308 ® Waveform analysis R&S History Export of history waveforms 7.4.2 History setup The "History" dialog contains the complete functionality on history viewing and informa- tion. The most important information and functions are also provided in the quick-access history dialog box. Access: "Menu"...
Page 309 ® Waveform analysis R&S History Sets the oldest acquisition in the sample memory as "Start acquisi- tion" and "Current acquisition". Starts and stops the replay of the history waveforms from "Start acquisition" to "Stop acquisition". Sets the newest acquisition in the sample memory as "Stop acquisi- tion"...
Page 310 ® Waveform analysis R&S History Time stamp The time stamp shows the time of the currently displayed history acquisition. Thus, the time relation between acquisitions is always available. The time stamp "Mode" can be absolute or relative: ● In "Absolute" mode, the instrument shows the date and the daytime of the current acquisition.
Page 311 ® Waveform analysis R&S History To display a particular acquisition 1. In the quick-access "History" dialog box, enter the number of the required acquisi- tion in the "Current acq" field. The newest acquisition always has the index "0", older acquisitions have a negative index. 2.
Page 312 ® Waveform analysis R&S XY-diagram To save the history data You can save the complete history, or some subsequent waveforms from the history, or a single history waveform. You can also decide to save the complete waveforms, or a part of each waveform. 1.
Page 313 ® Waveform analysis R&S XY-diagram You can display up to four different XY-diagrams that use the voltage level of a wave- form as the x-axis, rather than a time base. Make sure to select the tab of the required XY-diagram. Enable If activated, the XY-waveform is active and shown in a diagram, or it is minimized in a signal icon.
Page 314 ® Waveform analysis R&S XY-diagram ● The results of a mathematical function Remote command: on page 1516 WAVeform<wf>:XYCurve:XSOurce Y-source Defines the source to be used as the y-axis of the XY-diagram. Select one of the fol- lowing: ● One of the waveforms of any channel ●...
Page 315 ® Waveform analysis R&S XY-diagram The diagram is converted into an XY-diagram. To set up an XY-diagram 1. Press the [Apps] key. 2. In the >"Analysis" tab, tap the "XY-Diagram". 3. Enable the "XY-diagram". 4. In the "X-source" field, define the signal source that supplies the x-values of the XY-diagram.
Page 316 ® Measurements R&S Cursor measurements 8 Measurements Using the R&S RTP you can perform and display different measurements simultane- ously, based on the active signal or math waveforms. The color of the results in the result table corresponds with the source waveform color. The following measurement methods are available: ●...
Page 317 ® Measurements R&S Cursor measurements For details on using the result box, see Section 3.3.7, "Displaying results", on page 63 "Result position" on page 89. 8.1.1.1 Cursor measurements on time-based waveforms The cursor for measurement on time-based waveforms returns the following results. The results are displayed automatically when a cursor measurement is enabled.
Page 318 ® Measurements R&S Cursor measurements ● Starting a simple cursor measurement..............318 ● Configuring a cursor measurement...............318 ● Configuring the cursor display................320 ● Saving measurement results to file............... 320 8.1.2.1 Starting a simple cursor measurement To display cursors using the toolbar 1.
Page 319 ® Measurements R&S Cursor measurements ● Press the [Cursor] key. ● Use the overlay menu: – Double-tap a measurement result in the results table. – Adjust source, type, and positions of the cursor lines in the overlay menu. – Tap "Advanced Setup" to open the "Cursors" dialog. ●...
Page 320 ® Measurements R&S Cursor measurements 8.1.2.3 Configuring the cursor display By default, the cursors are displayed as lines in the diagrams and labeled according to the syntax: Cu<cursor set number>.<1|2> For example, the cursors for the cursor set 2 are labeled 2.1 and 2.2. The horizontal and the vertical cursors lines have the same labels.
Page 321 ® Measurements R&S Cursor measurements Figure 8-2: Setup for cursor on 1 source, with waveform tracking Figure 8-3: Setup for cursor on 2 sources Cu1, Cu2, Cu3, Cu4 The settings for each cursor measurement (or cursor set) are configured on separate tabs.
Page 322 ® Measurements R&S Cursor measurements Cursor On/Off Enables the selected cursor measurement. Remote command: on page 1518 CURSor<cu>:STATe Type Defines the cursor type to be used for the measurement. ● Horizontal cursors (Y-cursors) Horizontal cursors are positioned automatically along the waveform and can be adjusted manually ●...
Page 323 ® Measurements R&S Cursor measurements Envelope selection 1|2 Envelope selection is effective under the following conditions: ● The waveform arithmetic of the cursor source waveform is set to envelope wave- form (see "Arithmetic" on page 133) ● "Track waveform" is enabled. ●...
Page 324 ® Measurements R&S Cursor measurements Cu1, Cu2, Cu3, Cu4 The settings for each cursor measurement (or cursor set) are configured on separate tabs. For each cursor set, a horizontal pair of cursors, a vertical pair of cursors, or both can be displayed. Coupling (2 follows 1) Couple the horizontal and vertical cursor lines so that the distance between the two lines remains the same if one cursor is moved.
Page 325 ® Measurements R&S Cursor measurements X1 label, X2 label Defines a label to be displayed with the vertical cursors. By default, the cursors are labeled as Cu1.X1, Cu1.X2, Cu2.X1, Cu2.X2, Cu3.X1, Cu3.X2, Cu4.X1, Cu4.X2. Remote command: on page 1526 CURSor<cu>:LABel:X<n> Y1 label, Y2 label Defines a label to be displayed with the horizontal cursors.
Page 326 ® Measurements R&S Cursor measurements Cu1, Cu2, Cu3, Cu4 The settings for each cursor measurement (or cursor set) are configured on separate tabs. For each cursor set, a horizontal pair of cursors, a vertical pair of cursors, or both can be displayed. Source Defines the source of the cursor measurement.
Page 327 ® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements Remote command: on page 1699 CURSor<cu>:THReshold on page 1585 MEASurement<mg>:SPECtrum:ATHReshold Peak excursion Defines a relative threshold, the minimum level value by which the waveform must rise or fall to be considered as a peak. To avoid identifying noise peaks, enter a peak excursion value that is higher than the noise levels.
Page 328 ® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements The basic measurement settings are source, category, and the selection of the mea- surement. You can refine the setup to get more specific results: ● Gating A gate limits the measurement to a user-defined part of the waveform. See Sec- tion 8.2.3, "Measurement gates",...
Page 329 ® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements 8.2.1 Measurement setup in general Up to 8 measurement groups can be defined. Each measurement group is configured in its own subtab. For each measurement group, the category and the source are defined in the "Meas Group" tab, and you can also enable statistic evaluation. Availa- ble sources and measurements depend on the selected category, for example, histo- gram measurements need a defined histogram as source.
Page 330 ® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements 8.2.1.2 Configuring measurements 1. To open the "Measurements" dialog box, choose one of these ways: ● If a measurement is already running, tap the result table. Then press the [Measure] key. ● If no measurement is running, open the menu and select "Measure". If you double-tap the title of a result table, the toolbar assist opens.
Page 331 ® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements 7. A "Settings" icon indicates whether further settings are required. Tap the measure- ment. A dialog box opens, and you can adjust the measurement. The settings are explained in the following chapters: ● Section 8.2.4.2, "Settings for amplitude/time measurements", on page 345 ●...
Page 332 ® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements This section describes the settings that relate to all measurements. Specific settings are described in the corresponding category chapters: ● Section 8.2.4.2, "Settings for amplitude/time measurements", on page 345 ● Section 19.1, "Jitter measurements (option R&S RTP-K12)", on page 1044 ●...
Page 333 ® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements In the "Add / Remove Measurements" dialog box, select the measurements that you need. Tap "Clear" to disable all selected measurements. Tap "OK" to confirm the selec- tion. Remote command: on page 1534 MEASurement<mg>:MAIN on page 1535 MEASurement<mg>:ADDitional Envelope This setting is only available for measurements on envelope waveforms, see...
Page 334 ® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements You can enable statistical evaluation of the measurement results, and select the statistical results that you want to see. Statistic information is provided in the result box. Stopping and restarting the acquisition does not reset statistics but only stops and continues them.
Page 335 ® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements Icon Description The measurement result might not be correct due to insufficient amplitude level. Check your amplitude and reference level settings. Limit and margin checks passed. The measurement result might not be correct due to insufficient amplitude level. Check your amplitude and reference level settings.
Page 336 ® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements General display setting for measurements are provided in "Settings" > "Appearance" > "Measurements", see Section 4.3.8, "Measurement appearance settings", on page 90. Result lines Result lines mark the samples in the waveform that are used to obtain the measure- ment result.
Page 337 ® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements 8.2.3 Measurement gates Gate areas limit the measurement to a user-defined range of the waveform. The gate settings are defined on the "Gate " tab. Each measurement group can use its own gate. Make sure to select the correct mea- surement group.
Page 338 ® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements Result display settings are described in Section 8.2.2.3, "Display settings for results", on page 335. Use gate Considers the gating settings for the selected measurement and displays the gate. Remote command: on page 1620 MEASurement<mg>:GATE[:STATe] Apply to all meas If you enable the gate coupling, the gate settings of the selected measurement are copied to all other measurements.
Page 339 ® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements Remote command: on page 1635 CALCulate:MATH<m>:FFT:GATE:ABSolute:STARt on page 1636 CALCulate:MATH<m>:FFT:GATE:RELative:STARt on page 1621 MEASurement<mg>:GATE:ABSolute:STARt on page 1621 MEASurement<mg>:GATE:RELative:STARt on page 1700 SEARch:GATE:ABSolute:STARt on page 1701 SEARch:GATE:RELative:STARt (Relative) Stop Defines the end value for the gate. Remote command: on page 1635 CALCulate:MATH<m>:FFT:GATE:ABSolute:STOP...
Page 340 ® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements 8.2.4 Amplitude/time measurements 8.2.4.1 Overview of amplitude/time measurements Access: [Measure] > "Meas Group" tab > "Amp/Time" category The R&S RTP provides various voltage, time, area and counting measurements in the category "Amp/Time". Some measurements require reference levels to be set accord- ing to the measurement purpose.
Page 341 ® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements Amplitude measurements Access: [Measure] > "Meas Group" tab > "Amp/Time" category Table 8-1: Amplitude measurements Meas. type Symbol Description/Result High High High signal level Low signal level Amplitude Amplitude of the signal: the difference of high and low signal lev- Ampl High Absolute maximum value of the waveform...
Page 342 ® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements Meas. type Symbol Description/Result Cycle RMS CRMS The RMS (root mean square) value of one cycle Cycle σ (S-dev) Cycσ The standard deviation of one cycle σ Trig. ProbeMeter The DC voltage from the connected probe. Only available if an active Rohde &...
Page 343 ® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements Table 8-2: Time measurements Meas. type Symbol Description/Result Rise time RTime Rise time of the first rising edge, the time it takes the signal to rise from the lower reference level to the upper reference level. In manual reference level mode, the high and low reference lev- els are used.
Page 344 ® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements Meas. type Symbol Description/Result Phase Phase difference between two waveforms. Phase = Delay / Period * 360 Burst width BWid Duration of one burst, measured from the first edge to the last Pos. switching PSwit Settling time at rising edges: Time between crossing the lower reference level and the last return of the signal into the top toler- ance tube.
Page 345 ® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements Table 8-3: Area measurements Meas. type Symbol Description/Result Area Area Area between the waveform and a reference level ("Area level", : Evaluation time, time of a full waveform or limited by a Eval gate Cycle area CArea Area between the waveform and a reference level ("Area level") measured for one period, see also "Area"...
Page 346 ® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements If further settings are available for a measurement, a settings icon is shown beside the measurement's name in the "Active measurements" list. Tap the icon to configure the measurement. Figure 8-4: Selected active measurements, some have further settings Figure 8-5: Settings for cycle area measurement User Manual 1803.6484.02 ─...
Page 347 ® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements This chapter explains all settings for amplitude/time measurements. For a description of available measurement, see Section 8.2.4.1, "Overview of amplitude/time measure- ments", on page 340. results......................... 347 Signal threshold......................347 Area level........................347 Pulses slope........................347 Measured slope......................348 Measured slope...
Page 348 ® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements Remote command: on page 1546 MEASurement<mg>:AMPTime:PSLope Measured slope Selects the slope direction for frequency and period measurements, except for N- Period measurements. "Positive / Measures the time between rising or falling edges, respectively. Negative" "Either" In multiple measurements, the time is measured both between rising edges and between falling edges.
Page 349 ® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements With the settings shown in the picture, the time between the second and the fifth rising edge is measured. "Level selec- Selects the reference level on which the time is measured. tion" "Slope" Sets the edge of each source between which the delay is measured: positive, negative, or either of them.
Page 350 ® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements Hold Setup Hold Setup Data Clock Clock slope = Positive Clock slope = Either If at least one of the setup/hold measurements is selected, more settings appear to specify the measurement. "Clock slope" Sets the edge of the clock from which the setup and hold times are measured: positive, negative, or either of them.
Page 351 ® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements Data ref level / Ref level The setting defines the "Data ref level" for setup and hold measurements, and for time- interval error measurements (option R&S RTP-K12). It selects the reference level of the data signal on which the time is measured. The intersection of slope and reference level defines the time point for measurements.
Page 352 ® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements Trigger event Trigger level Trigger source Slope Reference level Measurement source Delay to trigger To configure the trigger conditions, use the trigger setup. To set up the slope, additional settings appear in the measurements "Setup" dialog box. "Edge slope"...
Page 353 ® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements Figure 8-6: Settings for reference level: upper, middle, lower Figure 8-7: Settings for reference level: user defined "Reference Selects the reference level of the measurement source on which the level" pulse is measured: upper, middle, lower level or user defined level. "Signal thresh- Sets a signal value that must be exceeded for the signal value to be old"...
Page 354 ® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements "Hysteresis" Sets the minimum level difference between the two sources before the next crossing can be detected. Remote command: on page 1555 MEASurement<mg>:AMPTime:VCMLevel on page 1553 MEASurement<mg>:AMPTime:VCHYsteresis Settings for N-Period Defines the settings for the N-period measurements. "Measured Sets the slope to be used as the beginning/ end of the measurement.
Page 355 ® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements The following measurements are available for PAM-N signals: ● "Amplitude" ● "Max" ● "Min" ● "Peak to peak" ● "Mean" ● "Rise time" ● "Fall time" ● "Slew rate rising" ● "Slew rate falling" ● "Signal level"...
Page 356 ® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements For more information about the measurements, see Section 8.2.4.1, "Overview of amplitude/time measurements", on page 340. Settings for amplitude/time measurements on higher order PAM-N signals Access: [Measure] > "Meas Group" tab > "Amp/Time" category > "PAM results". Figure 8-8: Predefined mode User Manual 1803.6484.02 ─...
Page 357 ® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements Figure 8-9: User-defined mode Preset configuration For easier configuration, you can use some of the predefined user configurations. For more specific user cases, you can also define your own settings. Mode ← Preset configuration Selects if you want to add "Pre-defined" user configurations to the active measure- ments, or define your own "User-defined"...
Page 358 ® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements Remote command: on page 1558 MEASurement<mg>:PAMResults:PRESetconfig:PRESet Active measurements In this table you can select the components for the measurement and their settings. Measurement ← Active measurements Selects a measurement from the list of active measurements. Remote command: on page 1560 MEASurement<mg>:PAMResults:RESultconfig<n>:MEASurement...
Page 359 ® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements Type Selects the type of arithmetic measurement: "Measure- Performs an arithmetic operation between two measurement results. You can select from the measurements enabled for "Amp/Time" or ment" "Spectrum". Figure 8-10: Arithmetic with two measurement results "Constant"...
Page 360 ® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements Operand 1 Selects the first operand for the arithmetics. You can select one of the measurements, that is enabled for the current measurement group. Remote command: MEASurement<mg>:SPECtrum:ARIThmetic:PARameter<n>:AMPTime on page 1567 MEASurement<mg>:AMPTime:ARIThmetic:PARameter<n>:AMPTime on page 1563 MEASurement<mg>:AMPTime:ARIThmetic:PARameter<n>:SPECtrum on page 1564 MEASurement<mg>:SPECtrum:ARIThmetic:PARameter<n>:SPECtrum on page 1568...
Page 361 ® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements Constant unit Selects the unit for the Arithmetic for amplitude/time and spectrum measurements. Remote command: on page 1561 MEASurement<mg>:AMPTime:ARIThmetic:COUNit on page 1565 MEASurement<mg>:SPECtrum:ARIThmetic:COUNit 8.2.4.5 Measuring the delay to trigger Delay to trigger measures the time between the trigger point and the following slope of a waveform.
Page 362 ® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements alizing jitter and allows you to analyze the reasons for it. By creating histograms of the eye diagram, important jitter parameters can be determined. The eye diagrams are a superposition of repetitively sampled waveforms, which have a length of about 1 bit.
Page 363 ® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements 8.2.5.1 Overview of eye diagram measurements Table 8-6: Eye measurements Meas. type Description/Result Extinction ratio (%) The extinction ratio is an indication of efficiency. It describes the ratio of the power used to transmit a logic level 1, to the energy used to trans- mit a logic level 0.
Page 364 ® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements Meas. type Description/Result Noise (RMS) Quadratic mean of the noise of eye top and eye base Noise (RMS) = (σtop + σbase)/2 S/N ratio Signal-to-noise ratio SNR = 10 * log (Eye amplitude / Noise RMS) Duty cycle distortion Duty cycle distortion = 20 * log (Eye amplitude / Noise RMS) Eye rise time...
Page 365 ® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements To obtain optimized settings for an eye measurement, use the "Autoset" function that is provided on the right side of the tab. General The settings in this dialog are relevant for the following eye measurements: "Extinction ratio (%)", "Extinction ratio (dB)", "Q factor", "Eye height", "Noise (RMS)", "S/N ratio", "Eye amplitude".
Page 366 ® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements "Start" Defines the global start for the eye measurements. "Stop" Defines the global stop for the eye measurements. "Algorithm" Defines how to compute the top/base level and the corresponding sigma values. ● "Mean": the mean value of the histogram. The Sigma value is the standard deviation of the histogram.
Page 367 ® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements Eye height In this dialog, you can define the settings for the eye height measurements. "Measurement Selects the algorithm for the measurement of the height. algorithm" The "Actual height" is the vertical distance between the top and the bottom of the eye opening at the sampling point.
Page 368 ® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements "Measurement Selects the algorithm for the measurement of the height. The follow- algorithm" ing algorithms are available: ● "Actual width (crossing level)": eye width is measured at crossing level. ● The "Maximum width " of an eye diagram is the maximum hori- zontal distance between the points where the ideal eye opening would cross the decision threshold level, assuming perfect signal timing, no jitter and no distortions.
Page 369 ® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements "Offset before Sets the local start level of the range for eye rise/fall time measure- first eye cross- ments. ing" "Offset after Sets the local stop level of the range for eye rise/fall time measure- ments.
Page 370 ® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements Remote command: on page 1580 MEASurement<mg>:EYEJitter:JITTer:MEASlevel on page 1581 MEASurement<mg>:EYEJitter:JITTer:RELative:LEVel 8.2.6 Spectrum measurements Spectrum analysis determines the frequencies of a given input signal over time. Vari- ous measurements can then be performed based on the signal spectrum. 8.2.6.1 Overview of spectrum measurements Table 8-7: Spectrum measurements...
Page 371 ® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements Meas. type Description, result THD_f, THD_a, These measurements require option R&S RTP-K37 Spectrum analysis. THD_u, THD_r THD_f is the root mean square of the sum of all amplitudes of the har- Total harmonic distor- monic waves in relation to the amplitude at the fundamental frequency tion (first harmonic): THD_a corresponds to THD[dB]:...
Page 372 ® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements For spectrum measurements, make sure that the start frequency and other FFT parameters are set correctly, and the fundamentals are not covered by the DC compo- nent of the signal. Consider also a gated measurement if the instrument cannot return any result.
Page 373 ® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements Remote command: on page 1584 MEASurement<mg>:SPECtrum:CPOWer:CFRequency Occup. BW Percentage of the total power used to determine the occupied bandwidth. Remote command: on page 1584 MEASurement<mg>:SPECtrum:OBANdwidth Threshold Defines an absolute threshold as an additional condition for the peak search. Only peaks that exceed the threshold are detected.
Page 374 ® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements If "Peak excursion" is 30 dB, the peaks 1 to 5 are found. If "Peak excursion" is 20 dB, also the peaks 6 to 10 are found. The cursor position is on peak 6. Remote command: on page 1698 CURSor<cu>:PEXCursion on page 1585...
Page 375 ® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements 8.2.7 Histograms and histogram measurements 8.2.7.1 Histogram characteristics Histograms are used to plot density of data, i.e. to display graphically how often which signal values occur. The histogram can be based on the input signal levels (ampli- tudes) or the timebase in a time domain measurement, or on frequencies or frequency levels in a spectrum measurement.
Page 376 ® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements 8.2.7.2 Overview of histogram measurements There are various measurements available to analyze histograms. Note that graphical changes on the display, e.g. changing the diagram size or the size of the result table, reset the histogram measurements in run mode and also in stop mode.
Page 377 ® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements Table 8-8: Histogram measurements Meas. type Description/Result Waveform count The number of acquisitions (waveforms) the histogram is based on Waveform samples The number of samples from the most recent acquisition included in the current histogram Histogram samples The number of samples from all acquisitions included in the current his- togram...
Page 378 ® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements Meas. type Description/Result Mean ±σ The range between (mean value + standard deviation) and (mean value - standard deviation) σ Mean ±2*σ The range between (mean value + 3 * standard deviation) and (mean value - 2 * standard deviation) σ...
Page 379 ® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements 8.2.7.3 Creating histograms Histograms can be used to evaluate the sample value occurrences directly. They are a prerequisite for histogram measurements. To create a histogram quickly with toolbar icons 1. Select the waveform for which you need a histogram. 2.
Page 380 ® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements 8. Enable the histogram. 8.2.7.4 Histogram setup "Menu" > "Apps" > "Analysis" tab > "Histogram" In this dialog box, you configure histograms on which you can perform further mea- surements. Enable Enables or disables the histogram evaluation and display. The histogram settings are kept until the histogram is deleted.
Page 381 ® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements Remote command: on page 1595 LAYout:HISTogram:MODE Reset Resets the values to begin a new histogram. Remote command: on page 1599 LAYout:HISTogram:RESet Mode (Horizontal / Vertical) Defines whether the value range limits are entered as absolute or relative values. Remote command: on page 1596 LAYout:HISTogram:HORZ:MODE...
Page 382 ® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements The measurement parameters are common for all histograms measurements, you find them directly on the "Meas Group" tab. Source Selects the histogram on which the measurement is based. Before, you have to define a histogram, see Section 8.2.7.3, "Creating histograms", on page 379.
Page 383 ® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements ● R&S RTP-K133 ● R&S RTP-K134 Section 19.1, "Jitter measurements (option R&S RTP-K12)", on page 1044. 8.2.9 Optical measurements This dialog provides settings for testing optical signals. Optical measurements require an optical power signal provided by an optical probe. For accurate measurements, a dark calibration of the optical probe is required.
Page 384 ® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements Figure 8-15: Modulation amplitude settings Unit Selects the unit of the optical measurement. Remote command: on page 1591 MEASurement<mg>:OPTical:UNIT Start Sets the start value of the range for the optical modulation amplitude. Remote command: on page 1590 MEASurement<mg>:OPTical:OMAMplitude:RELative:STARt Stop Sets the end value of the range for the optical modulation amplitude.
Page 385 ® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements 8.2.10.1 Overview of protocol measurements If option R&S RTP-K35 is installed, enhanced measurements on the supported serial buses are possible. With it, you can measure various dependencies between the frames. Additional to option R&S RTP-K35 you need one of the following serial protocol options: ●...
Page 386 ® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements Meas. type Description / result Frame error rate Sum of all frames with errors divided by all frames within the acquisition window Consecutive frame error Measures the rate at which at least two consecutive frames have an error rate 8.2.10.2 Settings for protocol measurements...
Page 387 ® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements The types of available frames and fields are depending on the enabled protocol. Table 8-11: Available protocol frames Protocol Frame Field Address 2. Addr Data MISO Word MOSI CAN/CAN FD Remote Data Data Overload WAKE Data Data User Manual 1803.6484.02 ─...
Page 388 ® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements Protocol Frame Field RFFE Register 0 Write Register Write Register Read Extended Register Write Addr Extended Register Read Mask Extended Register Write Long Data Extended Register Read Long Interrupt Summary and Identifica- tion Masked Write Master Ownership Handover Master Write Master Read...
Page 389 ® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements on page 1614 MEASurement<mg>:PROTocol:F2FRame:VALFrom on page 1614 MEASurement<mg>:PROTocol:F2FRame:VALTo Trigger to frame Opens a dialog to set up the parameters for the trigger to frame measurement. The types of available frames are depending on the enabled protocol, see Table 8-11.
Page 390 ® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements "Value" Sets a value for the selected field. "Field to be Selects the type of field which value is tracked over time. tracked" Remote command: on page 1615 MEASurement<mg>:PROTocol:FLDValue:FLD on page 1615 MEASurement<mg>:PROTocol:FLDValue:FRM on page 1615 MEASurement<mg>:PROTocol:FLDValue:TRCK on page 1616 MEASurement<mg>:PROTocol:FLDValue:VAL...
Page 391 ® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements 8.2.11.1 Statistics Statistics can be compiled for each measurement group separately, and also for long- term measurements. If enabled, statistical results are shown in the result box. By default, all events in each acquisition are measured and incuded in the statitics: the measurement result is not only determined once within one acquisition, but repeatedly, if available.
Page 392 ® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements ● on page 1539 MEASurement<mg>:RESult:NPEak? ● on page 1539 MEASurement<mg>:RESult:PPEak? ● on page 1539 MEASurement<mg>:RESult:RMS? ● on page 1539 MEASurement<mg>:RESult:STDDev? ● on page 1539 MEASurement<mg>:RESult:WFMCount? ● on page 1540 MEASurement<mg>:RESult:STARt? ● on page 1540 MEASurement<mg>:RESult:STOP? ●...
Page 393 ® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements Performing long-term measurements 1. On the "Meas" menu, select "Result Analysis". 2. Select the subtab for the measurement group you want to configure. 3. Under "Long term", tap "Enable". 4. Since the waveform can change in the process of time, enable "Continuous auto scale"...
Page 394 ® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements Enabling the track enables also the Continuous auto scale Measure all events in each acquisition. To analyze the track, you can use cursor measurements and zoom. Creating a track waveform 1. Configure the measurement group. 2.
Page 395 ® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements Measurement for plot Selects the measurement that is used as source for mathematic calculations, long-term measurements, and histograms. These evaluations are performed on one measure- ment only, not on all measurements of the group. Statistics are calculated for all mea- surements.
Page 396 ® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements Remote command: on page 1607 MEASurement<mg>:STATistics:HISTogram Number of bins Sets the number of bins - the number of vertical bars that build the histogram. If "Continuous auto scale" is enabled, the instrument determines the number of bins based on the timebase, the current measurements, and other settings.
Page 397 ® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements Analysis scale The measurement scale of a long-term measurement diagram or measurement histo- gram can be set automatically by the instrument, or manually. Use automatic scaling if the measurement is running and you cannot see the expected results.
Page 398 ® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements Remote command: on page 1611 MEASurement<mg>:LTMeas:COUNt Scale mode Defines when the points of a long-term measurement are created. If statistics are enabled, each long-term measurement point shows the statistical mean and standard deviation of the results measured during the defined period. If statistics are disabled, the first measurement result of each period is taken as long- term measurement point.
Page 399 ® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements This setting is only available if "Scale mode" is set to "Measurements". Remote command: on page 1609 MEASurement<mg>:STATistics:RMEascount 8.2.12 Limit and margin checks Limit and margin checks evaluate whether the measurement result exceeds a specified value.
Page 400 ® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements 8.2.12.2 Limit and margin settings Access: [Measure] > "Advanced" tab If a check is selected, tap "Setup" to set the limit and margin values and the range of valid measurement results. Type Selects and enables the limit or margin check. "Off"...
Page 401 ® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements outside Upper limit Upper margin Upper margin Upper limit Lower margin Lower limit Lower limit Lower margin outside Figure 8-16: Limit and margin definition Limits are stricter than the margins for the value check. Thus, the margins must be within the valid range.
Page 402 ® Measurements R&S Automatic measurements Actions are initiated by all measurements and all results measured on one acquisition. Note that the violation actions do not distinguish between a margin violation and a limit violation. However, different icons are displayed in the result box. For each action, you can define the event on which the action is initiated: ●...
Page 403 ® Measurements R&S Quick measurements When "Trigger Out Pulse" is used, the trigger control option "Enable trigger out" is dis- abled. Thus, the trigger-out pulse is created only on limit violation but not when a trig- ger occurs. The pulse is provided always with the minimum delay of 800 ns, the "Delay"...
Page 404 ® Measurements R&S Quick measurements 3. Tap the diagram. The result box shows the results of the default quick measurement. 8.3.2 Configuring the quick measurement The default configuration of the quick measurement includes already 8 amplitude mea- surements. If these measurements do not fit the measurement task, you can modify the selection.
Page 405 ® Spectrum analysis R&S FFT analysis 9 Spectrum analysis The R&S RTP provides two ways of spectrum analysis: ● Basic FFT calculation, which is included in the firmware ● Spectrum analysis option R&S RTP-K37, which provides a wide range of analysis possibilities, for example, spectrogram, cursor and automatic measurements.
Page 406 ® Spectrum analysis R&S FFT analysis The overlapping factor can be set freely. The higher the overlap factor, the more frames are used. This leads to more individual results and improves detection of transi- ent signal effects. However, it also extends the duration of the calculation. The size of the frame depends on the number of input signal values (record length), the overlap factor, and the FFT size (number of samples used for FFT calculation).
Page 407 ® Spectrum analysis R&S FFT analysis Gate length Gate position Gate t[s] Center frequency f[Hz] Frequency span Restricting the result range You can restrict the results of the FFT analysis to a specified frequency range. The fre- quency range can be defined in two ways: ●...
Page 408 ® Spectrum analysis R&S FFT analysis (im), the magnitude is displayed. For the "Advanced" mode FFT (φ) function, the phase is displayed. For magnitude display, you can select the scale and range of magnitudes to be dis- played. For linear scaling, the vertical value range of the input signal is used. For loga- rithmic scaling, the logarithmic power of the frequency is displayed.
Page 409 ® Spectrum analysis R&S FFT analysis ● FFT -dφ*df (group delay): the negative derivative of the phase with respect to fre- quency; useful to measure phase distortion 9.1.2 Configuring spectrum waveforms During FFT analysis, a signal in the time domain is converted to a spectrum of frequen- cies.
Page 410 ® Spectrum analysis R&S FFT analysis 3. Double-tap the editing area. The "Formula Editor" is displayed. 4. Delete the contents of the edit field. 5. Tap the "More" key to display further functions in the editor. 6. Tap the required FFT function key. 7.
Page 411 ® Spectrum analysis R&S FFT analysis 3. Disable the "Span/RBW coupling". 4. Specify the frequency range you want to display using one of the following meth- ods: ● Enter a "Center frequency" and a "Frequency span" that define the spectrum. ●...
Page 412 ® Spectrum analysis R&S FFT analysis being used ("Use Gate" disabled). The RBW is adapted so that the record length can be acquired in the specified acquisition time. However, the RBW is restricted, so that data acquisition may fail if the record length is too long for the specified acquisition time.
Page 413 ® Spectrum analysis R&S FFT analysis To couple spectrum displays The settings for one or more spectrums can be coupled. Thus, if any FFT setting for any of the coupled spectrums are changed, they are changed for all coupled spec- trums.
Page 414 ® Spectrum analysis R&S FFT analysis Type..........................414 Display........................414 Frequency axis......................414 Center frequency......................415 Frequency span......................415 Full span........................415 Start frequency......................415 Stop frequency......................415 Span/RBW Coupling....................415 Span/RBW Ratio......................416 Resolution BW......................416 Window type........................416 Use color table......................416 Type Selects between the magnitude and phase spectrum type.
Page 415 ® Spectrum analysis R&S FFT analysis "Logarithmic" Logarithmic scaling "Linear Unit" Linear scaling Remote command: on page 1628 CALCulate:MATH<m>:FFT:LOGScale Center frequency Defines the position of the displayed frequency range, which is (Center - Span/2) to (Center + Span/2). The width of the range is defined using the "Frequency span" set- ting.
Page 416 ® Spectrum analysis R&S FFT analysis Span/RBW Ratio Defines the coupling ratio for Span/RBW. This setting is only available if CALCulate: is ON. MATH<m>:FFT:BANDwidth[:RESolution]:AUTO Remote command: on page 1631 CALCulate:MATH<m>:FFT:BANDwidth[:RESolution]:RATio Resolution BW Defines the resolution bandwidth. Note that the resolution bandwidth is correlated with the span, record length and acquisition time.
Page 417 ® Spectrum analysis R&S FFT analysis If this option is disabled, the preset color of the selected channel source is displayed, and the intensity of the specific signal color varies according to the cumulative occur- rence of the values. For spectrum diagrams, this setting corresponds to the common waveform display.
Page 418 ® Spectrum analysis R&S FFT analysis However, if the maximum number of FFTs is lower than the required number to cover the entire waveform, the waveform may only be analyzed partially. In this case, the "Frame coverage" indicates the percentage of the waveform that was analyzed, i.e. which part of the data was included in the FFT calculation.
Page 419 ® Spectrum analysis R&S FFT analysis FFT gating allows you to restrict FFT analysis to a certain time base of the input signal. If no gate is used, you can define the record length as dependent on the RBW, or the RBW as dependent on the record length (which is defined by the acquisition time).
Page 420 ® Spectrum analysis R&S FFT analysis Zoom ← Gate Definition Zoom coupling is available if a zoom is defined. As long as "Zoom coupling" is enabled, the gate area is defined identically to the zoom area - if you change the zoom, the gate changes as well.
Page 421 ® Spectrum analysis R&S FFT analysis Record Length/RBW Coupling The record length and resolution bandwidth are coupled during FFT analysis. If you change one value, the other must be adapted accordingly. You can keep either value constant, thus preventing automatic adaptation when the other parameter is changed. However, this may cause the FFT analysis to fail.
Page 422 ® Spectrum analysis R&S FFT analysis Coupled to M1...M8 Copies the current FFT settings of the selected math waveform (M1...M8) to the other selected math waveforms, and couples those waveforms. Thus, if any FFT setting for any of the coupled spectrums are changed, they are changed for all coupled spec- trums.
Page 423 ® Spectrum analysis R&S FFT analysis Figure 9-1: Scale settings of magnitude spectrum Figure 9-2: Scale settings of phase spectrum See also: ● Vertical scale mode (Manual/Auto) ● Vertical offset User Manual 1803.6484.02 ─ 08...
Page 424 ® Spectrum analysis R&S FFT analysis ● Vertical scale Unit Defines the scaling unit for magnitude display. Available units depend on the unit of the selected source waveform. "Linear" displays the RMS value of the voltage. Remote command: on page 1638 CALCulate:MATH<m>:FFT:MAGNitude:SCALe Reference level Defines the reference level if "dB"...
Page 425 ® Spectrum analysis R&S Spectrum analysis (option R&S RTP-K37) Remote command: on page 1640 CALCulate:MATH<m>:FFT:PHASe:THReshold 9.2 Spectrum analysis (option R&S RTP-K37) This chapter describes the Spectrum analysis option R&S RTP-K37. 9.2.1 Spectrogram display The Spectrum analysis option provides a new diagram for spectrum waveforms: a spectrogram.
Page 426 ® Spectrum analysis R&S Spectrum analysis (option R&S RTP-K37) 9.2.2 Spectrum analysis functions In addition to spectrograms, the Spectrum analysis option also provides some new automatic measurements based on spectrum waveforms. ● A peak list measurement detects all peaks above a user-definable threshold and optionally indicates the peaks in the spectrum diagram.
Page 427 ® Spectrum analysis R&S Spectrum analysis (option R&S RTP-K37) A small arrow icon labeled "T1" / "T2" indicates the position of the time line in the spectrogram. The spectrum diagram displays the results for the selected waveforms. A new sig- nal icon is displayed on the signal bar for each time line ("SGxTL1|2").
Page 428 ® Spectrum analysis R&S Spectrum analysis (option R&S RTP-K37) Display Enables the spectrogram display. If enabled, a new signal icon for the spectrogram is displayed on the signal bar ("SGx"). Remote command: on page 1643 CALCulate:MATH<m>:FFT:SPECtrogram:STATe Time line 1/2 A time line marks a single spectrum in the spectrogram, that is: the power vs frequency results for the data acquired at a specific time.
Page 429 ® Mask testing R&S About mask testing 10 Mask testing 10.1 About mask testing Masks are used to determine whether the signal remains within specified limits, e.g. to uncover signal anomalies or test compliance and stability of digital signals. The limits are specified as "mask", which is laid over the input signal in the display.
Page 430 ® Mask testing R&S About mask testing Acq. completed Number of tested acquisitions. Remote command: on page 1662 MTESt:RESult:COUNt:WAVeforms? Acq. remaining Remaining acquisitions until "Average count / Nx Single count" is reached. The value is useful if you test a specified number of acquisitions with action "Stop acquisition"...
Page 431 ® Mask testing R&S Mask test settings Test result A test has failed if the number of sample hits or acquisition hits exceeds the limit of "Violation tolerance" hits. Remote command: on page 1662 MTESt:RESult[:RESult]? 10.2 Mask test settings 10.2.1 Define mask Access: [Apps] >...
Page 432 ® Mask testing R&S Mask test settings Make sure that the correct "Mask Test" tab is selected on the left side before you enter the settings. Remote commands: on page 1645 MTESt:ADD on page 1646 MTESt:REMove Enable Activates and deactivates the mask test. If the acquisition is running, the test starts immediately.
Page 433 ® Mask testing R&S Mask test settings "Open" Opens a dialog box where you can select the file name. See also: Section 12.5, "File selection dialog", on page 521. "Save, Save Stores the specified file. As" Remote command: on page 1648 MTESt:FILE:NAME on page 1649 MTESt:FILE:SAVE...
Page 434 ® Mask testing R&S Mask test settings Alternatively, you can set the corner points on the touch screen and adjust the values in the "Mask Definition" tab. To save the mask, select the "Define Mask" tab and save the mask test. Make sure that the correct "Mask Test"...
Page 435 ® Mask testing R&S Mask test settings on page 1652 MTESt:SEGMent:REGion on page 1651 MTESt:SEGMent:COUNt? Configure Opens a dialog to define the selected segment. Definition of segment The number of the selected segment is shown above the table. In the definition table, the individual points of the selected mask segment are listed with exact horizontal and vertical numerical coordinates.
Page 436 ® Mask testing R&S Mask test settings Rescale You can rescale and move mask segments by numerical input of factors and offsets. The values change the selected mask segment and take effect on "Apply". Offset X ← Rescale Moves the mask segment horizontally. The specified offset is added to the x-values of all points of the selected mask segment.
Page 437 ® Mask testing R&S Mask test settings A waveform mask is created from an existing waveform. The waveform builds the upper and lower limit line of the mask, and the limits are moved and stretched. The result is a tolerance tube around the waveform that is used as mask. During mask testing using a waveform mask, the record length is limited to 1 MSam- ple.
Page 438 ® Mask testing R&S Mask test settings Signal The reference waveform is created from the selected "Source". Sets the reference waveform from which the mask is created. Create ← Signal Creates the upper and lower mask limit from the "Source" and "Ref used in mark". If the reference waveform was not defined before, it is created automatically from the mask test "Source"...
Page 439 ® Mask testing R&S Mask test settings Figure 10-3: Waveform mask with vertical width = 0.5 div Remote command: on page 1657 MTESt:WFMRescale:YWIDth Vertical stretch Sets the vertical scaling to stretch the mask in y-direction. The scaling axis is the hori- zontal line through the lowest value of the lower mask limit.
Page 440 ® Mask testing R&S Mask test settings Figure 10-5: Waveform mask with vertical width = 0.5 div and vertical position = -0.5 div Remote command: on page 1658 MTESt:WFMRescale:YPOSition 10.2.3 Define Test Access: [Apps] > "Analysis" tab > "Mask" > "Define Test" There are two usual test practices: ●...
Page 441 ® Mask testing R&S Mask test settings ● "Acquisitions": Considers the number of acquisitions that contain at least one sam- ple hit. How many samples hit the mask in that acquisition is not relevant. "Violation tolerance" sets the number of tolerable sample hits or acquisition hits. A test has failed if the number of sample hits or acquisition hits exceeds the limit of vio- lation tolerance hits.
Page 442 ® Mask testing R&S Mask test settings Save screenshot ← Action on mask Saves a screenshot including the mask test results according to settings in "Menu" > "Save/Recall" > "Save" tab > "Screenshot". Remote command: on page 1659 MTESt:ONViolation:PRINt Save waveform ← Action on mask Saves the waveform data to a file according to settings in "Menu"...
Page 443 ® Mask testing R&S Mask testing on eye diagrams In this dialog, you can reset the mask results and display the mask. Show mask Switches the display of all mask segments on or off. Remote command: on page 1646 MTESt:SHOW Mask results >...
Page 444 ® Mask testing R&S Mask testing on eye diagrams Figure 10-6: Mask test results of eye testing Slices completed = Number of slices that contributed to the eye diagram Sample hits = Number of samples that hit the mask Slice hits = Number of violated slices Violation details = Shows the table with violations of the last acquisition Zoom coupling...
Page 445 ® Mask testing R&S Mask testing on eye diagrams 10.3.2 Test definition for eye mask tests Access: [Apps] > "Analysis" tab > "Define Mask" tab 1. Select the "Source": the channel waveform that is analyzed for jitter. 2. Select the "Mask Type" = "Eye". 3.
Page 446 ® Mask testing R&S Mask testing on eye diagrams Shape Defines the outline of the eye mask: square, diamond, hexagon, octagon or ellipse. Remote command: on page 1665 MTESt:EYEMask:TYPE PAM eye Enable if a PAM-N signal is used for the mask. Remote command: on page 1668 MTESt:EYEMask:PAMNeye...
Page 447 ® Mask testing R&S Mask testing on eye diagrams Remote command: on page 1666 MTESt:EYEMask:HPERiod Top/Bottom setup Defines the settings for the top and bottom segments of the mask. You have to enable "Top" / "Bottom" for this settings to be relevant. Symmetric ←...
Page 448 ® Mask testing R&S Working with masks 10.4 Working with masks This chapter explains step-by-step how mask tests are setup and preformed. For the explanation of the individual settings, see Section 10.2, "Mask test settings", on page 431. ● Setting up user masks...................448 ●...
Page 449 ® Mask testing R&S Working with masks To create a mask numerically in the dialog box The settings mentioned here are described in detail in Section 10.2.1, "Define mask", on page 431. 1. Open [Apps] > "Analysis" tab > "Mask" > "Define Mask" tab. 2.
Page 450 ® Mask testing R&S Working with masks 2. Tap the "Masks" icon on the toolbar. 3. Tap the corner points of the new mask segment on the touch screen. 4. To finish the segment and mask definition, double-tap the last point. To delete a mask segment on the touch screen 1.
Page 451 ® Mask testing R&S Working with masks Tap the segment's row in the "User Mask: Segments" table and tap the required button below: ● "Insert": to add a new segment before the selected segment. ● "Append": to add a new segment at the end of the list. ●...
Page 452 ® Mask testing R&S Working with masks e) To move the selected point, change the X- and Y-values. To rescale and move a mask segment The settings mentioned here are described in detail in Section 10.2.2, "Mask defini- tion", on page 433. 1.
Page 453 ® Mask testing R&S Working with masks 10.4.2 Setting up a mask test In addition to the mask definition, the mask test contains further settings: ● The waveform to be tested ● The criteria for a failed test ● The actions to be taken if a test has failed or has been completed successfully 1.
Page 454 ® Mask testing R&S Working with masks ● Mask with contact: this color shows that the edge of the mask segment was touched. In this case, the resolution is not sufficient to detect if the mask was really hit or not. Zoom into the concerned area to see the correct result. 10.4.4 Running a mask test Before you can start a mask test, make sure that the mask setup is complete: ●...
Page 455 ® Mask testing R&S Working with masks 10.4.6 Mask testing on history acquisitions In the same way as for running acquisitions, you can set up and perform the mask test- ing also on history waveforms. The requirements for mask testing on history waveforms are also the same: ●...
Page 456 ® Search functions R&S Overview: search definition and results 11 Search functions Search functions allow you to detect and analyze specific events in the acquired data quickly and simply. You can search in various waveforms for several events at once. The search area can be limited by a gate.
Page 457 ® Search functions R&S Search setup Gating is not available for searches on digital signals and serial buses. ● Result presentation For each search, you define how the search results are displayed: in a result table and/or in a search zoom window. Remote commands: ●...
Page 458 ® Search functions R&S Search setup 11.2.1 Search criteria Access: "Menu" > "Apps" > "Analysis" tab > "Search" > "Setup" tab Enable If you enable a search and run an acquisition, the search is performed continuously on the acquired data until acquisition is stopped. If acquisition is stopped and you enable a search, the data of the last acquisition is searched.
Page 459 ® Search functions R&S Search setup Depending on the selected source, different search criteria are available. Remote command: on page 1671 SEARch:SOURce Edge, Glitch, Width, Runt, Window, Timeout, Interval, Slew rate, Setup & Hold, State, Pattern Search criteria for analog and digital input signals, math and reference waveforms, and tracks.
Page 460 ® Search functions R&S Search setup For serial protocol options, search on a serial bus is available. These searches have protocol-specific search criteria. For details, see the relevant chapters of the "Protocol Analysis" chapter. ● Edge........................460 ● Glitch........................461 ● Width........................461 ●...
Page 461 ® Search functions R&S Search setup 11.2.2.2 Glitch The glitch search works the same way as the glitch trigger. To apply the trigger settings to search, tap Copy from trigger The glitch search is not available if the search source is a digital channel. Polarity, Range, Width See trigger settings: ●...
Page 462 ® Search functions R&S Search setup Polarity, Range, Width, ±Delta See trigger settings: ● "Polarity" on page 207 While the width trigger can only analyze positive or negative polarity, searching for a width is also possible for both polarities at the same time ("Either"). ●...
Page 463 ® Search functions R&S Search setup Polarity, Range, Runt width, ±Delta Time limit for the runt, see trigger settings: ● "Polarity" on page 206 ● "Range" on page 209 ● "Runt width" on page 210 ● "±Delta" on page 210 Remote command: on page 1678 SEARch:TRIGger:RUNT:POLarity...
Page 464 ® Search functions R&S Search setup Vertical condition Defines the run of the signal relative to the window, see "Vertical condition" on page 211. Remote command: on page 1686 SEARch:TRIGger:WINDow:RANGe Time condition, Width, ±Delta Set the time limit for the vertical condition, see: ●...
Page 465 ® Search functions R&S Search setup Range, Time Set the timeout condition, see: ● "Range" on page 213 ● "Time" on page 213 Remote command: on page 1683 SEARch:TRIGger:TIMeout:RANGe on page 1683 SEARch:TRIGger:TIMeout:TIME Level Sets the voltage level for trigger search. The value is used for all search event types that require one trigger level.
Page 466 ® Search functions R&S Search setup Slope, Range, Interv. width, ±Delta Set the interval condition, see: ● "Slope" on page 214 While the interval trigger can only analyze rising or falling edges, searching for a width is possible for both edges at the same time ("Either"). ●...
Page 467 ® Search functions R&S Search setup Polarity, Range, Slew rate, ±Delta ● "Slope" on page 205 ● "Range" on page 215 ● "Slew rate" on page 216 ● "±Delta" on page 216 Remote command: on page 1681 SEARch:TRIGger:SLEWrate:SLOPe on page 1681 SEARch:TRIGger:SLEWrate:RANGe on page 1681 SEARch:TRIGger:SLEWrate:TIME...
Page 468 ® Search functions R&S Search setup Clock source, Clock edge, Clock level Set the clock settings. Both "Clock level" and "Clock edge" define the starting point for calculation of the setup and hold time. Remote command: on page 1689 SEARch:TRIGger:SETHold:CSOurce on page 1689 SEARch:TRIGger:SETHold:CEDGe on page 1689...
Page 469 ® Search functions R&S Search setup 11.2.2.10 State The state search is a qualified edge search. The state search is only available for ana- log channel sources (Ch1 to Ch4). Clock source, Clock edge Define the clock settings. The clock signal is the waveform to be searched. Remote command: on page 1696 SEARch:TRIGger:STATe:CSOurce...
Page 470 ® Search functions R&S Search setup Pattern Pattern search settings are the same as for the pattern trigger. See also "Pattern" on page 220. Remote command: on page 1691 SEARch:TRIGger:PATTern:A[:ENABle] on page 1691 SEARch:TRIGger:PATTern:A:LOGic on page 1692 SEARch:TRIGger:PATTern:AB:LOGic on page 1692 SEARch:TRIGger:PATTern:ABCD:LOGic Timing condition: Mode, Range, Time, Width, ±Delta Additional time limitation to the pattern, see...
Page 471 ® Search functions R&S Search setup 11.2.3 Frequency marker search When you start a search on a spectrum, a frequency marker search is performed to detect peaks in a spectrum. You can define which peaks the instrument finds by defin- ing the noise reject settings.
Page 472 ® Search functions R&S Search gate 3. Enter a name for the search using the on-screen keyboard. To configure a user-defined search 1. Open the search dialog: "Menu" > "Apps" > "Analysis" tab > "Search". 2. Select the "Setup" tab and the search that you want to configure. 3.
Page 473 ® Search functions R&S Search gate Use gate Enables the gate settings and shows the gate. Search is only performed on the defined gate area of the source waveform. Remote command: on page 1699 SEARch:GATE[:STATe] Display state Displays the gate area in the source diagram. Remote command: on page 1700 SEARch:GATE:SHOW...
Page 474 ® Search functions R&S Search gate (Relative) Stop Defines the end value for the gate. Remote command: on page 1635 CALCulate:MATH<m>:FFT:GATE:ABSolute:STOP on page 1636 CALCulate:MATH<m>:FFT:GATE:RELative:STOP on page 1621 MEASurement<mg>:GATE:ABSolute:STOP on page 1621 MEASurement<mg>:GATE:RELative:STOP on page 1700 SEARch:GATE:ABSolute:STOP on page 1701 SEARch:GATE:RELative:STOP Zoom Zoom coupling is available if a zoom is defined.
Page 475 ® Search functions R&S Search display presentation 3. Use one of the following methods: a) Set the absolute or relative "Gate description" . Enter the start and stop values of the gate area. b) If a zoom area has already been defined for the waveform, couple the gate area to the zoom area by selecting the "Couple to zoom"...
Page 476 ® Search functions R&S Search display presentation The following settings configure the layout of the result table in the "Search Results" box and the size and position of the search zoom window. The result tables can be sor- ted by x-position or value. You can define a maximum number of table entries. Show result table Displays or hides the search result table.
Page 477 ® Search functions R&S Search display presentation Export results Opens a dialog to define the export reults. Section 12.2.4, "Results", on page 506. 11.4.2 Display zoom settings You can display a zoom window for the currently selected search result. The zoom area is indicated in the diagram that displays the source waveform of the search.
Page 478 ® Search functions R&S Search display presentation on page 1707 SEARch:RESDiagram:VERT:ABSolute:SPAN on page 1708 SEARch:RESDiagram:VERT:RELative:SPAN X mode Defines whether absolute or relative values are used to specify the x-axis values. Remote command: on page 1485 LAYout:ZOOM:HORZ:MODE on page 1705 SEARch:RESDiagram:HORZ:MODE X position Defines the x-value of the centerpoint of the zoom area.
Page 479 ® Search functions R&S Search display presentation To display search zoom windows 1. In the "Search > Display" tab, enable "Show result zoom". This stops a running search and a running acquisition. The zoom area is indicated in the diagram that displays the source waveform of the search.
Page 480 ® Data and file management R&S Save and recall user settings 12 Data and file management This chapter describes how to manage instrument settings, and measurement results like waveform data, numeric results and screenshots. The "Save/Recall" dialog provides functions for saving and restoring data on the instru- ment.
Page 481 ® Data and file management R&S Save and recall user settings Figure 12-1: Save tab Access to load instrument settings: "Menu" key > "Save/Recall" key > "Recall" tab > "User settings" Figure 12-2: Recall tab User Manual 1803.6484.02 ─ 08...
Page 482 ® Data and file management R&S Save and recall user settings The R&S RTP provides the following types of saving and restoring settings: ● Savesets contain the complete instrument and measurement configuration except for user-specific display settings. ● One File contains the saveset and active reference waveform files in a ZIP file. ●...
Page 483 ® Data and file management R&S Save and recall user settings Save to file Enter the filename to save the setting data to, and select the file format with the format button on the right. Double-tap the filename to open the file selection dialog box. See also: Section 12.5, "File selection dialog",...
Page 484 ® Data and file management R&S Save and recall user settings the instrument settings, make sure to create a reference waveform from the channel waveform before you save the One File. The waveform generator/pattern generator and the pulse source state is saved as "Off".
Page 485 ® Data and file management R&S Save and recall user settings Load from file Select "Open" to open the file selection dialog box, and to select the required file. See also: Section 12.5, "File selection dialog", on page 521. By default, one file names have the prefix "OneFile_". Remote command: on page 1719 SAVeset:ONEFile:NAME...
Page 486 ® Data and file management R&S Save and recall user settings Save to file The file name to save the data to. By default, user preference file names have the prefix "UserPreferences_". "Save" Saves the data to the selected file. "Save As..."...
Page 487 ® Data and file management R&S Save and recall user settings 1. On the toolbar, tap the "Saveset with preview " icon. A window opens and shows the screenshot of the first measurement configuration that is stored in the default directory. 2.
Page 488 ® Data and file management R&S Save and recall user settings To save settings to a saveset file Alternatively, you can add the " Save settings" icon to the toolbar and use the icon to store the saveset file to the folder and file specified in the "Settings" tab. See also Section 3.3.6.2, "Configuring the toolbar",...
Page 489 ® Data and file management R&S Save and recall waveform data and results Tap "Open" to navigate to a different file. Select the file from the file selection dialog box and tap "Select". The saved settings and reference waveforms are loaded to the R&S RTP. 12.2 Save and recall waveform data and results Access: "Menu"...
Page 490 ® Data and file management R&S Save and recall waveform data and results 12.2.1 Waveform export files Waveforms can be stored in XML, CSV, or BIN format. Reloading waveforms: Restrictions To reload waveform data as a reference waveform, it must be stored in BIN format. If multiple acquisitions of one waveform are exported (Data logging or Multiple wave- forms), only the first acquisition can be reloaded.
Page 491 ® Data and file management R&S Save and recall waveform data and results Table 12-1: Header file properties Value Description General FirmwareVersion Firmware version that is installed on the R&S RTP (last entry in the header file) Source Name of the exported waveform Resolution Time between two samples Resolution = 1 / Sample Rate...
Page 492 ® Data and file management R&S Save and recall waveform data and results Value Description SignalHardwareRecordLength Number of samples actually available in this waveform, including the number of required samples in the waveform and the additional samples needed for further computation LeadingSettlingSamples Relevant only for BIN files.
Page 493 ® Data and file management R&S Save and recall waveform data and results Value Description BaseYStop Vertical stop value of the waveform Multi channel export The header files contain strings like this: MultiChannelVerticalOffset: 4:1.63:1.96:0:0:1e-005:0:-1e+026:1e+026:1e-005:10:0:V:. Only the first 5 values and the unit at the end of the string are relevant for data analysis.
Page 494 ® Data and file management R&S Save and recall waveform data and results Value Description WindowType Window used for the spectrum computation ResolutionBW Resolution bandwidth of the spectrum AdjustedResolutionBW Actual resolution bandwidth of a spectrum waveform. The value is only valid if the exported waveform is a spectrum.
Page 495 ® Data and file management R&S Save and recall waveform data and results Value Description SignalFormat Format of the data values: ● FLOAT: floating point numbers, general export format ● INT (8 Bit): Integer 8 bit, used for "Raw (ADC sample)"...
Page 496 ® Data and file management R&S Save and recall waveform data and results In XML and CSV waveform value files, the data of each sample is grouped. The exam- ple shows the values of two samples for two waveforms and interleaved x/y data. The first waveform is an envelope, the second one is a normal waveform.
Page 497 ® Data and file management R&S Save and recall waveform data and results No of values per waveform = InterleavedTraceCount * SignalHardwareRecordLength If multiple acquisitions are exported, the total number of values in the file is: No of values = InterleavedTraceCount * SignalHardwareRecordLength * No of expor- ted acquisitions If "Interleaved x/y"is enabled, one horizontal value is added per sample.
Page 498 ® Data and file management R&S Save and recall waveform data and results Multi channel Enables or disables the export of multiple input channels. If enabled, you can export the data of selected input channels (Selected sources) into one file. If disabled, you can export one "Source"...
Page 499 ® Data and file management R&S Save and recall waveform data and results The created file can be used as a reference source for math equations and for the advanced eye. Remote command: on page 1728 EXPort:WAVeform:ICDR Source Selects the waveform to be exported if "Multichannel export" is disabled. Active waveforms of input channels, math signals, reference waveforms and advanced jitter analysis are available for export.
Page 500 ® Data and file management R&S Save and recall waveform data and results on page 1724 EXPort:WAVeform:STOP on page 1724 EXPort:WAVeform:ZOOM on page 1724 EXPort:WAVeform:CURSorset on page 1725 EXPort:WAVeform:MEAS Raw (ADC direct) Enables the export of analog channel data in the raw sample format of the ADC. The data format is integer 8 bit (signed 8-bit binary format).
Page 501 ® Data and file management R&S Save and recall waveform data and results Interleaved x/y Includes horizontal values in the export data (time or frequency values, depending on the waveform). X and Y-values are written alternately to the file. If disabled, only Y-val- ues - mostly voltage values - are written.
Page 502 ® Data and file management R&S Save and recall waveform data and results In this dialog you can configure the export of the history waveform data to file. Select the channels and scope in the "Setup" tab. Export history Enables the history mode and the export of history waveforms to file. Remote command: on page 1510 CHANnel<ch>[:WAVeform<wf>]:HISTory[:STATe]...
Page 503 ® Data and file management R&S Save and recall waveform data and results "Save As..." Opens the file selection dialog box and saves the waveform to the selected file. See also Section 12.5, "File selection dialog", on page 521 ".bin/.xml/.csv" Selects the file format.
Page 504 ® Data and file management R&S Save and recall waveform data and results Remote command: on page 1337 (Nx Single acquisition) RUNSingle 12.2.3 Histogram Access: "Menu" key >"Save/Recall" key > "Save" tab > "Histogram" The waveform histogram export saves data in two files. The *.Wfm.* file contains 256 or 512 absolute or relative histogram values.
Page 505 ® Data and file management R&S Save and recall waveform data and results YStart -0.25 V YStop 0.25 V HistogramValuesCount 256 (total number of written rows in a CSV file) HistogramValueNumber 68 (number of the row in a CSV file) Y-Value (0.25 - (-0.25)) / 256 * 68 - 0.25 = -0.11719 V The histograms settings are defined in the "Histogram"...
Page 506 ® Data and file management R&S Save and recall waveform data and results Remote command: on page 1729 EXPort:HISTogram:NAME on page 1729 EXPort:HISTogram:SAVE on page 1729 EXPort:HISTogram:DATA? 12.2.4 Results In this dialog, you can select the result boxes to be saved, and define the storage set- tings.
Page 507 ® Data and file management R&S Save and recall waveform data and results Numeric values in decimal and without unit By default, numeric result values are written with their unit to the file. If the option is enabled, the values are saved with more decimal places. Export results Enter the filename to save the results to.
Page 508 ® Data and file management R&S Save and recall waveform data and results Long-term measurements: The *.Wfm.* file contains one value or value set for each long-term measurement point. The maximum number of points is defined in the "Horizontal scaling" dialog box. ●...
Page 509 ® Data and file management R&S Save and recall waveform data and results Measurement Selects the measurement to be exported. Remote command: on page 1731 EXPort:MEASurement:SELect Source, Measurement scale Displays the measurement settings source and scale. Export type You can export the result data of the long-term measurement, the measurement histo- gram or the track.
Page 510 ® Data and file management R&S Save and recall waveform data and results Save to file Enter the filename to save the measurement data to. Double-tap the filename to open the file selection dialog box. By default, the filename has the prefix "Measurement_". You can define a pattern for automatic naming in the "Autonaming"...
Page 511 ® Data and file management R&S Save and recall waveform data and results ● Image height ● Image width ● Pixel format ● XStart ● XStop ● YStart ● YStop The data file contains the comma-separated list of the pixel values. The number of lines and columns corresponds to the number of lines and rows of the eye diagram image.
Page 512 ® Data and file management R&S Save and recall waveform data and results C:\Users\Public\Documents\Rohde-Schwarz\RTP\Eyes "Save" Saves the measurement data in the selected file. "Save As..." Opens the file selection dialog box and saves the measurement data to the selected file. See also Section 12.5, "File selection dialog", on page 521...
Page 513 ® Data and file management R&S Save and recall waveform data and results 4. In the "Scope" list, select the part of the waveform record to be saved. Zoom, cur- sor and gate segments require the same setup for the selected waveform before saving.
Page 514 ® Data and file management R&S Screenshots To load waveform data as a reference waveform To reload waveform data from a previous measurement, the waveform must have been stored as a reference waveform in a BIN file before. The procedure is described in Section 7.2.1, "Working with reference waveforms", on page 276.
Page 515 ® Data and file management R&S Screenshots Example: Reading meta information using the ExifTool. Command: # exif C:\Screenshot_2020-07-14_0_110551.png Result: ExifTool Version Number : 10.20 File Name : Screenshot_2016-07-14_0_110551.png Directory : C:/ File Size : 37 kB File Modification Date/Time : 2020:07:14 11:05:51+02:00 File Access Date/Time : 2020:07:14 11:05:51+02:00 File Creation Date/Time...
Page 516 ® Data and file management R&S Screenshots Preview........................516 Update.........................516 View / Annotate......................516 White background....................... 516 Inverse color........................517 Show setup dialog.......................517 Show only grid......................517 Screenshot of tabs...................... 517 Save to file........................517 Preview Shows a preview of the screenshot. The image is created when the dialog box opens. Update Updates the preview of the screenshot with the current display view, e.g.
Page 517 ® Data and file management R&S Screenshots "White background" "Inverse color" Background Waveform and results White Screen colors White Inverted colors Black Inverted colors Black Screen colors Remote command: on page 1735 HCOPy:WBKG Inverse color Inverts the colors of the output, i.e. a dark waveform is shown on a white background. See also: "White background"...
Page 518 ® Data and file management R&S Screenshots Remote command: on page 1734 HCOPy:DEVice<m>:LANGuage on page 1733 HCOPy:DESTination<m> on page 1733 MMEMory:NAME on page 1736 HCOPy:IMMediate<m>[:DUM] on page 1736 HCOPy:IMMediate<m>:NEXT on page 1715 MMEMory:DELete 12.3.2 Configuring and saving screenshots You can edit the image, invert all colors, and set the background color. A preview of the current image is shown for reference.
Page 519 ® Data and file management R&S Reports 12.4 Reports Reports document the current measurement and test results. The report contains gen- eral information, current vertical and horizontal settings, trigger settings, active chan- nels and all current results except for zoom and search results. A screenshot is also included.
Page 520 ® Data and file management R&S Reports Language Selects the language to be used in the report. Available languages are listed in the specifications document. Remote command: on page 1737 REPort:LANGuage Paper size Selects the paper size: A4 or US Letter. Remote command: on page 1737 REPort:PAPersize...
Page 521 ® Data and file management R&S File selection dialog 12.5 File selection dialog The file selection dialog provides a file explorer from which you can select a file to load or to save data to. You can also manage your files in this dialog. Path Tap the path elements to change the current folder.
Page 522 ® Data and file management R&S File selection dialog Save, Select Selects the specified file for the open or save operation and closes the dialog box. Cancel Closes the dialog box without selecting a file. User Manual 1803.6484.02 ─ 08...
Page 523 ® Signal configuration R&S Signal configuration setup 13 Signal configuration In the signal configuration dialog, you can set up a signal according to the used serial standard. Also you can set up a user-defined signal up to PAM-8 and define signal and reference levels.
Page 524 ® Signal configuration R&S Signal configuration setup Instruments Number of active Maximum acquisition mode Maximum nominal symbol bandwidth channels rate R&S RTP- R&S RTP- K136 K137 up to 8 GHz 1 channel 40 GSa/s 8 Gbit/s 8 Gbit/s 2 channels: If serial number >...
Page 525 ® Signal configuration R&S Signal configuration setup Technology Serial standard PAM order Symbol rate HDMI 1.4 2/NRZ 3.4 GBaud HDMI 2.0 2/NRZ 4.8 GBaud PCIe PCIe Gen 1 2/NRZ 2.5 GBaud PCIe Gen 2 2/NRZ 5 GBaud PCIe Gen 3 2/NRZ 8 GBaud PCIe Gen 4...
Page 526 ® Signal configuration R&S Signal flow overview Selects the PAM order. You can select a value up to 8. For some serial standards there is a pre defined value for the PAM order, see Technology and serial standard proper- ties. Remote command: on page 1743 SIGNalconfig:SETup:SETTing<m>:PAMorder...
Page 527 ® Signal configuration R&S Signal and reference levels for NRZ signals Depending on your available options, you can perform: ● Deembedding (option R&S RTP-K121), see Section 21, "Deembedding (option R&S RTP-K121/-K122)", on page 1128. ● Embedding / Equalization (option R&S RTP-K126), see Section 22, "Embedding and equalization (option R&S RTP-K126)",...
Page 528 ® Signal configuration R&S Signal and reference levels for NRZ signals In addition to reference and signal levels, you can define a hysteresis for the middle reference level and tubes for signal levels. Hysteresis is useful for measurements that determine zero-crossings. Period, frequency, and pulse measurements are based on hysteresis - the instrument returns results if the amplitude of the signal exceeds the hysteresis.
Page 529 ® Signal configuration R&S Signal and reference levels for NRZ signals 5. By default, the lower reference level is defined at 10% of the signal amplitude, the middle reference level at 50% and the upper reference level at 90%. In the "Ref. levels" tab, you can select other "Relative levels" to be used for evalua- tion.
Page 530 ® Signal configuration R&S Signal and reference levels for NRZ signals b) If "Level mode" is relative, select one of the predefined "Relative levels". If default percentages do not fit, select "User defined" and enter the percentages for the upper, middle, and lower reference levels. The high and low signal levels are computed from the reference level values and the percentage values.
Page 531 ® Signal configuration R&S Signal and reference levels for NRZ signals Figure 13-1: Automatic signal level definition Manual reference level mode In manual reference level mode, relative and absolute level definitions are possible. In manual reference level mode with relative level definition, you define the absolute values of high and low signal levels or reference levels, and the reference levels as percentages of the signal amplitude.
Page 532 ® Signal configuration R&S Signal and reference levels for NRZ signals Remote command: on page 1748 REFLevel<rl>:LDETection Signal level Defines the computation method for high and low signal levels. The instrument ana- lyzes the signal, performs amplitude and histogram measurements, and defines the signal levels using the selected method.
Page 533 ® Signal configuration R&S Signal and reference levels for NRZ signals Remote command: on page 1753 REFLevel<rl>:ABSolute:LOW Histogram averaging Enables averaging over several histograms to determine the reference levels. This function is only available in automatic level mode. Remote command: on page 1751 REFLevel<rl>:AUTO[:STATe] Average Count...
Page 534 ® Signal configuration R&S Signal and reference levels for NRZ signals Figure 13-4: Automatic level detection mode, relative reference level definition In manual reference level mode with absolute level definition, you define the absolute values of high and low signal levels or reference levels, and the distances between ref- erence and signal levels.
Page 535 ® Signal configuration R&S Signal and reference levels for NRZ signals Relative levels Sets the lower, middle and upper reference levels, defined as percentages of the signal amplitude. Available relative levels: ● 5/50/95 ● 10/50/90 ● 20/50/80 ● User defined: Enter "Upper ref level", "Middle ref level", and "Lower ref level". For example, for "5/50/95"...
Page 536 ® Signal configuration R&S Signal and reference levels for NRZ signals Remote command: on page 1753 REFLevel<rl>:ABSolute:BDIStance Top distance The distance between the high signal level and the upper reference level - for manual reference level mode and absolute level definition. Remote command: on page 1753 REFLevel<rl>:ABSolute:TDIStance...
Page 537 ® Signal configuration R&S Signal configuration for PAM-N signals (R&S RTP-K135) Remote command: on page 1757 REFLevel<rl>:RELative:HYSTeresis Top outer Defines an area above the high signal level which is still considered to be high level. Remote command: on page 1758 REFLevel<rl>:ABSolute:TOTube on page 1761 MEASurement<mg>:REFLevel:RESult:TOUTer?
Page 538 ® Signal configuration R&S Signal configuration for PAM-N signals (R&S RTP-K135) The following sections describe the signal and reference level definition of signals with PAM order > 2. Pulse Amplitude Modulation (PAM) enables higher data rates on interfaces such as Ethernet, Fibre Channels or PCI express.
Page 539 ® Signal configuration R&S Signal configuration for PAM-N signals (R&S RTP-K135) Level detection algorithm Selects the algorithm that defines how the signal levels are detected. Remote command: on page 1768 REFLevel<rl>:PAMSignal:LVLalgorithm Estimate signal levels Starts a software algorithm for the automatic determination of the signal level. The val- ues are displayed in "Signal level n".
Page 540 ® Signal configuration R&S Signal configuration for PAM-N signals (R&S RTP-K135) Source Defines the source for which the reference levels are defined. The source can be any signal input, math or reference waveform. Remote command: Source is defined by suffix <m> in "REFLevel" subsystem, see Section 26.17.2, "Signal anad reference levels for NRZ signals",...
Page 541 ® Signal configuration R&S Signal configuration for PAM-N signals (R&S RTP-K135) Remote command: on page 1767 REFLevel<rl>:PAMSignal:LEVel<n> REFLevel<rl>:PAMReference:LVLJumphgt<n>:THReshold<o>:ABSLower on page 1763 REFLevel<rl>:PAMReference:LVLJumphgt<n>:THReshold<o>:ABSMiddle on page 1763 REFLevel<rl>:PAMReference:LVLJumphgt<n>:THReshold<o>:ABSupper on page 1764 REFLevel<rl>:PAMReference:LVLJumphgt<n>:THReshold<o>:RELLower on page 1764 REFLevel<rl>:PAMReference:LVLJumphgt<n>:THReshold<o>:RELMiddle on page 1764 REFLevel<rl>:PAMReference:LVLJumphgt<n>:THReshold<o>:RELupper on page 1765 13.4.3 Advanced tab Access: "Menu"...
Page 542 ® Protocol analysis R&S Basics of protocol analysis 14 Protocol analysis Using the serial protocol options for the R&S RTP, you can analyze various serial pro- tocols. ● Basics of protocol analysis..................542 ● I²C (option R&S RTP-K1)..................552 ● SPI bus (option R&S RTP-K1)................
Page 543 ® Protocol analysis R&S Basics of protocol analysis ● Search on decoded signal data: For most serial protocols, you can find various events in the decoded data. You can find the same events that you can trigger on, and even many more, because several event types can be combined. Thus, you get the results for the complete acquisition cycle.
Page 544 ® Protocol analysis R&S Basics of protocol analysis Make sure that the tab of the correct serial bus is selected. Protocol Defines the protocol type of the selected serial bus. Remote command: on page 1769 BUS<m>:TYPE Decode Enables the decoding of the selected bus. The signal icon of the bus appears on the signal bar.
Page 545 ® Protocol analysis R&S Basics of protocol analysis on page 1770 BUS<m>:FAUToset There are some limitations for the autoset: ● It is not available, if the digital MSO channels are selected as a source for the waveform. ● Signals with longer idle phases might not find horizontal adjustment. ●...
Page 546 ® Protocol analysis R&S Basics of protocol analysis You can also use the label list to trigger on an identifier or address. Instead of entering the value, you select the name, which is defined in the label list. Show table Opens a table with decoded data of the serial signal.
Page 547 ® Protocol analysis R&S Basics of protocol analysis 14.1.4 Content and format of the PTT file Label lists are stored as PTT (protocol translation table) files. The PTT file format is an extension of the CSV format (comma-separated values). You can edit it with standard editors, for example, with MS Excel or a text editor.
Page 548 ® Protocol analysis R&S Basics of protocol analysis Format Suffix Example Octal 152o, DeviceName Binary 01101010b, DeviceName The maximum supported word size for (unsigned) integers is 64 bits. # --- Start of PTT file @FILE_VERSION = 1.0 @PROTOCOL_NAME = i2c Following two lines are equal: 7,01h,Temperature 7,01h, Temperature...
Page 549 ® Protocol analysis R&S Basics of protocol analysis 14.1.6 Export protocol results In the "Export Protocol Results" dialog, you can export the results and all details of the selected protocol. This is availble for the following protocols: ● ARINC 429 ●...
Page 550 ® Protocol analysis R&S Basics of protocol analysis Include frame timing Includes the frame timing. Remote command: on page 1773 BUS<m>:EXPResult:TIME Include details Includes the detailed results for all frames. Remote command: on page 1772 BUS<m>:EXPResult:DETail Export to file Enter the filename to save the results to. Double-tap the filename to open the file selection dialog box.
Page 551 ® Protocol analysis R&S Basics of protocol analysis 14.1.7 Bit pattern editor If you want to enter a specified address or data pattern, the bit pattern editor helps you to enter the pattern in various formats - decimal, hexadecimal, octal, binary and ASCII. The editor displays the pattern in two columns.
Page 552 ® Protocol analysis R&S I²C (option R&S RTP-K1) Where applicable, frequently used values are provided in a "Predefined values" list below the pattern table, for example, reserved end words of data packets in the UART protocol. 14.2 I²C (option R&S RTP-K1) The Inter-Integrated Circuit is a simple, low-bandwidth, low-speed protocol used for communication between on-board devices.
Page 553 ® Protocol analysis R&S I²C (option R&S RTP-K1) ● ACKnowledge bits: is issued by the receiver of the previous byte if the transfer was successful Exception: At read access, the controller terminates the data transmission with a NACK bit after the last byte. ●...
Page 554 ® Protocol analysis R&S I²C (option R&S RTP-K1) Trigger The R&S RTP can trigger on various parts of I²C messages. The data and clock lines must be connected to the input channels, triggering on math and reference waveforms is not possible. You can trigger on: ●...
Page 555 ® Protocol analysis R&S I²C (option R&S RTP-K1) See also: Section 14.1.1, "Setup - general settings", on page 543 SDA, SCL Set the waveforms of the data line (SDA) and clock line (SCL). Usually, the source is one of the analog channels. Reference and math waveforms are available as source if the trigger source is one of the analog channels but not the serial bus.
Page 556 ® Protocol analysis R&S I²C (option R&S RTP-K1) Threshold Sets the threshold value for digitization of signals for each line. If the signal value on the line is higher than the threshold, the signal state is high (1 or true for the Boolean logic).
Page 557 ® Protocol analysis R&S I²C (option R&S RTP-K1) # --------------------------------------------------------------------------- # Labels for I2C protocol Column order: Identifier type, Identifier value, Label # --------------------------------------------------------------------------- 7,0x1E,Voltage 7,38h,Pressure 7,2Ah,Temperature 7,16h,Speed 7,118,Acceleration 7,07h,HighSpeed_Master_0x3 7,51h,EEPROM 10,3A2h,DeviceSetup 10,1A3h,GatewayStatus 10,06Eh,LeftSensor # ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 14.2.2.3 Configuring I²C protocol The configuration of the I²C is simple - assign the two lines to input channels, and set the thresholds.
Page 558 ® Protocol analysis R&S I²C (option R&S RTP-K1) Make sure that: ● In the [Bus] > "Setup" tab: – The correct "Protocol" is selected. – The data sources of the serial bus are channel signals. ● In the "Trigger" > "Setup" tab: –...
Page 559 ® Protocol analysis R&S I²C (option R&S RTP-K1) Repeated start ← Trigger type Sets the trigger to a repeated start - when the start condition occurs without previous stop condition. Repeated start conditions occur when a primary exchanges multiple messages with a secondary without releasing the bus. Stop ←...
Page 560 ® Protocol analysis R&S I²C (option R&S RTP-K1) ● Adress Type ● "Address" on page 561 ● R/W bit Address and data ← Trigger type Sets the trigger to a combination of address and data condition. You can specify: ● Adress Type ●...
Page 561 ® Protocol analysis R&S I²C (option R&S RTP-K1) "Data read Nack" Marks the end of the read process when the primary reads data from the secondary. This Nack is sent according to the protocol definition, it is not an error. Remote command: on page 1780 TRIGger<m>:I2C:ADNack...
Page 562 ® Protocol analysis R&S I²C (option R&S RTP-K1) OR x Enables each selected condition, for "Trigger Type" = "Address OR". Remote command: on page 1782 TRIGger<m>:I2C:ADOR<n>:ENABle Position Sets the number of data bytes to be skipped after the address. You can define an exact position, or a position range.
Page 563 ® Protocol analysis R&S I²C (option R&S RTP-K1) 6. For more complex trigger types, enter the address and/or data conditions: address, acknowledge bits, R/W bit, and data pattern. For details, see Section 14.2.3, "I²C trigger", on page 557 14.2.4 I²C decode results When the configuration of the serial bus is complete, the signal can be decoded: 1.
Page 564 ® Protocol analysis R&S I²C (option R&S RTP-K1) Column Description Address value (hex) Hexadecimal value of the address Label Symbolic label name defined in the label list R/W bit Value of the R/W bit Bit rate Value of the bit rate Table 14-3: Content of the Decode results table Column Description...
Page 565 ® Protocol analysis R&S I²C (option R&S RTP-K1) Select search types Enable the events to be searched for. Unlike triggering, where you can trigger only on one defined event, you can search for various different events in one search. "Start" Searches for the start of the message.
Page 566 ® Protocol analysis R&S I²C (option R&S RTP-K1) "Address and Searches for a combination of address and data conditions. data" Remote command: on page 1794 SEARch:TRIGger:I2C:SCONdition on page 1794 SEARch:TRIGger:I2C:RCONdition on page 1794 SEARch:TRIGger:I2C:STCNdition on page 1794 SEARch:TRIGger:I2C:NACKnowledge on page 1795 SEARch:TRIGger:I2C:SADDress on page 1795 SEARch:TRIGger:I2C:ADOR...
Page 567 ® Protocol analysis R&S SPI bus (option R&S RTP-K1) No ACK setup: Addr/W/R NACK The no ACK setup consists of the Addr/W/R NACK. The no ACK setup settings are the same as in the I2C trigger setup, see "No Ack con- ditions"...
Page 568 ® Protocol analysis R&S SPI bus (option R&S RTP-K1) ● Main data output, sub data input (MOSI or SDI) ● Main data input, sub data output (MISO or SDO) When the main generates a clock and selects a sub device, data can be transferred in either or both directions simultaneously.
Page 569 ® Protocol analysis R&S SPI bus (option R&S RTP-K1) See also: Section 14.1.1, "Setup - general settings", on page 543 SCLK Defines the settings for the clock line. SCLK source ← SCLK Sets the input channel of the clock line. Waveform 1 of channel signals, math wave- forms, and reference waveforms can be used for decoding.
Page 570 ® Protocol analysis R&S SPI bus (option R&S RTP-K1) SS, MISO, MOSI Configures the Slave Select, MISO and MOSI lines. Source ← SS, MISO, MOSI Sets the input channel of the selected line. Usually, the source is one of the analog channels. Reference and math waveforms are available as source if the trigger source is one of the analog channels but not the serial bus.
Page 571 ® Protocol analysis R&S SPI bus (option R&S RTP-K1) There are several ways to set the threshold: ● "Threshold" Enter the value directly in the field. ● "Autoset" Starts software algorithms for determining the signal threshold levels and bitrate. ● "Find thresholds"...
Page 572 ® Protocol analysis R&S SPI bus (option R&S RTP-K1) Autoset Starts software algorithms for determining the signal threshold levels and bitrate. Remote command: on page 1770 BUS<m>:FAUToset Frame condition Defines the start of a frame. A frame contains a number of successive words, at least one word.
Page 573 ® Protocol analysis R&S SPI bus (option R&S RTP-K1) 14.3.3 SPI trigger 14.3.3.1 SPI trigger Access: [Bus] > "Shortcuts" tab > "Setup trigger" Make sure that: ● In the [Bus] > "Setup" tab: – The correct "Protocol" is selected. – The data sources of the serial bus are channel signals.
Page 574 ® Protocol analysis R&S SPI bus (option R&S RTP-K1) "MOSI/MISO" Sets the trigger to specified data patterns expected on the MOSI and MISO lines on the same time. Remote command: on page 1815 TRIGger<m>:SPI:TYPE MOSI and MISO data conditions The trigger on MOSI and MISO patterns is defined in the same way: Condition ←...
Page 575 ® Protocol analysis R&S SPI bus (option R&S RTP-K1) Index min, Index max ← MOSI and MISO data conditions The effect of data positioning depends on the Search mode. It sets the number of bits or words before the first word of interest. These offset bits/words are skipped. If the position operator defines a range, the first and the last bit/word of interest are defined.
Page 576 ® Protocol analysis R&S SPI bus (option R&S RTP-K1) Decode Results Table The "Decode results" table contains information about all decoded frames. Table 14-4: Content of the "Decode results" table Column Description State Overall state of the frame Frame start Times of frame start and frame end Count Number of words in the frame...
Page 577 ® Protocol analysis R&S SPI bus (option R&S RTP-K1) Type Sets the event to be searched for. "Frame start Searches for the start of the frame when slave select signal SS (SS)" changes to the active state. This type is available if the slave select line is configured in the bus setup, and the frame condition is "SS".
Page 578 ® Protocol analysis R&S UART/RS-232/RS-422/RS-485 (option R&S RTP-K2) Remote command: on page 1823 SEARch:TRIGger:SPI:FCONdition on page 1824 SEARch:TRIGger:SPI:MISopattern on page 1824 SEARch:TRIGger:SPI:MOSipattern on page 1824 SEARch:TRIGger:SPI:DPOPerator on page 1824 SEARch:TRIGger:SPI:DPOSition on page 1825 SEARch:TRIGger:SPI:DPTO on page 1825 SEARch:TRIGger:SPI:PALignment 14.3.5.2 SPI search results To get search results, "Enable"...
Page 579 ® Protocol analysis R&S UART/RS-232/RS-422/RS-485 (option R&S RTP-K2) The UART protocol has no clock for synchronization. The receiver synchronizes by the start and stop bits, and the bit rate that must be known to the receiver. Trigger The R&S RTP can trigger on specified parts of UART serial signals: ●...
Page 580 ® Protocol analysis R&S UART/RS-232/RS-422/RS-485 (option R&S RTP-K2) See also: Section 14.1.1, "Setup - general settings", on page 543 Source: Tx, Rx Select the input channels for the transmitter and receiver signals. Usually, the source is one of the analog channels. Reference and math waveforms are available as source if the trigger source is one of the analog channels but not the serial bus.
Page 581 ® Protocol analysis R&S UART/RS-232/RS-422/RS-485 (option R&S RTP-K2) Remote command: on page 1832 BUS<m>:UART:BITRate on page 1832 BUS<m>:UART:BAUDrate Data bits Sets the number of data bits of a word in a range from 5 bits to 8 bits. If no parity bit is used, then 9 data bits are possible.
Page 582 ® Protocol analysis R&S UART/RS-232/RS-422/RS-485 (option R&S RTP-K2) Remote command: on page 1770 BUS<m>:FAUToset Bit order Defines if a word starts with msb (most significant bit) or lsb (least significant bit). The display of the decoded signal considers this setting, results are displayed in the speci- fied order.
Page 583 ® Protocol analysis R&S UART/RS-232/RS-422/RS-485 (option R&S RTP-K2) 7. Set the logical thresholds. 8. Set the "Bit rate" and "Stop bits". 9. Set the "Data bits" and "Parity". 10. Set the "Bit order", "Polarity" and "Packets". 11. Enable "Decode". 14.4.3 UART trigger 14.4.3.1 UART trigger settings Access: [Bus] >...
Page 584 ® Protocol analysis R&S UART/RS-232/RS-422/RS-485 (option R&S RTP-K2) "Data" Trigger on a serial pattern at a defined position in the data packet. The pattern can include several subsequent symbols (data frames). "Data conditions" on page 584. "Parity error" Triggers on a parity error indicating a transmission error. This trigger type is only available if a parity is configured for the UART bus.
Page 585 ® Protocol analysis R&S UART/RS-232/RS-422/RS-485 (option R&S RTP-K2) Pattern ← Data conditions Specifies the data pattern to be found on the specified trigger source, in binary or hex format. Enter the words in msb first bit order. The starting point of the pattern is defined Position Index min, Index max.
Page 586 ® R&S Protocol analysis UART/RS-232/RS-422/RS-485 (option R&S RTP-K2) 2. In the "Serial Bus" dialog > "Display" tab, select additional result display settings: "Show table" and "Show binary". 3. If required, enable "Zoom coupling" For a description of the display settings, see also Section 14.1.3, "Display", on page 545.
Page 587 ® Protocol analysis R&S CAN and CAN FD (option R&S RTP-K3/K9) Remote commands Remote commands to retrieve decode results are described in Section 26.18.5.3, "Decode results", on page 1837. 14.5 CAN and CAN FD (option R&S RTP-K3/K9) CAN is the Controller Area Network, a bus system designed by Bosch for use within automotive network architecture, for example, for brake, power train and engine man- agement.
Page 588 ® Protocol analysis R&S CAN and CAN FD (option R&S RTP-K3/K9) Figure 14-6: Configuration for CAN FD User Manual 1803.6484.02 ─ 08...
Page 589 ® Protocol analysis R&S CAN and CAN FD (option R&S RTP-K3/K9) Figure 14-7: Configuration for CAN See also: Section 14.1.1, "Setup - general settings", on page 543 Protocol Defines the protocol type of the selected serial bus. Remote command: on page 1769 BUS<m>:TYPE Decode Enables the decoding of the selected bus.
Page 590 ® Protocol analysis R&S CAN and CAN FD (option R&S RTP-K3/K9) A math waveform can be used, for example, if you probe on CAN-High and CAN-Low using two single-ended probes, and the difference between high and low is calculated and displayed using a math waveform. Remote command: on page 1840 BUS<m>:CAN:DATA:SOURce...
Page 591 ® Protocol analysis R&S CAN and CAN FD (option R&S RTP-K3/K9) Remote command: on page 1842 BUS<m>:CAN:DATA:THReshold on page 1842 BUS<m>:CAN:TECHnology on page 1770 BUS<m>:SETReflevels on page 1770 BUS<m>:FAUToset Bit rate (CAN) / Arbitration rate (CAN FD) For CAN buses, the "Bit rate" sets the number of transmitted bits per second. For CAN FD buses, this parameter is called "Arbitration rate"...
Page 592 ® Protocol analysis R&S CAN and CAN FD (option R&S RTP-K3/K9) The CAN bus interface uses an asynchronous transmission scheme. The standard specifies a set of rules to resynchronize the local clock of a CAN node to the message. The sample point divides the nominal bit period into two distinct time segments. The length of the time segments is defined in time quanta according to network and node conditions during CAN development.
Page 593 ® Protocol analysis R&S CAN and CAN FD (option R&S RTP-K3/K9) Time segment1, Time segment2 Set the number of time quanta before the sample point (Time segment 1) and after the sample point (Time segment 2). The "Sample point" percentage value is adjusted accordingly. Time segments 1 comprises the segments Synch_seg, Prop_seg, and Phase_seg1 which are specified in the CAN standard.
Page 594 ® Protocol analysis R&S CAN and CAN FD (option R&S RTP-K3/K9) "PetrolLevel", starts at bit #24, has a length of 8 bit, and the unit is liter. The signal "IdleRunning" is state-encoded. It has only one bit. The binary value 0 means "Run- ning", and the binary value 1 means "Idle".
Page 595 ® Protocol analysis R&S CAN and CAN FD (option R&S RTP-K3/K9) 14.5.3 CAN / CAN FD trigger The R&S RTP can trigger on various events in a CAN or CAN FD frame. Trigger condi- tions include start of frame, frame ID, data pattern, or error conditions. 14.5.3.1 Trigger settings Access: [Bus] >...
Page 596 ® Protocol analysis R&S CAN and CAN FD (option R&S RTP-K3/K9) Trigger type Selects the trigger type for CAN analysis. "Start of frame" Triggers on the first edge of the dominant SOF bit (synchronization bit). "Frame type" Triggers on a specified frame type (data, remote, error, or overload). For data and remote frames, also the identifier format is considered.
Page 597 ® Protocol analysis R&S CAN and CAN FD (option R&S RTP-K3/K9) "Identifier + Data" Sets the trigger to a combination of identifier and data condition. The instrument triggers at the end of the last byte of the specified data pattern. The identifier conditions are the same as for the "Identifier"...
Page 598 ® Protocol analysis R&S CAN and CAN FD (option R&S RTP-K3/K9) "Symbolic" The "Symbolic" trigger type is available if a DBC label list file is loa- ded and applied. It allows you to trigger on a specific data message, or a signal and its value that appears inside the message, see Sec- tion 14.5.6.1, "Symbolic trigger",...
Page 599 ® Protocol analysis R&S CAN and CAN FD (option R&S RTP-K3/K9) "Any" The ID type and ID pattern are not relevant for the trigger condition. If the trigger type is "Identifier", the instrument triggers on any identi- fier in the specified frame type. If the trigger type is "Identifier + Data", set the "ID type"...
Page 600 ® Protocol analysis R&S CAN and CAN FD (option R&S RTP-K3/K9) Data setup: DLC, NDB, Transfer, Condition, Data min, Data max The data setup consists of the transfer direction, the number of bytes, the condition, and one or two data patterns. To trigger only on data, set the "ID type"...
Page 601 ® Protocol analysis R&S CAN and CAN FD (option R&S RTP-K3/K9) Data position The data position sets the location in the data field where the instrument looks for the specified data pattern. The position can be defined if the data field of the frame is lon- ger than 8 bytes - if DLC ≥9.
Page 602 ® Protocol analysis R&S CAN and CAN FD (option R&S RTP-K3/K9) 14.5.3.2 Triggering on CAN FD data The "Identifier + Data" trigger type supports triggering on data bytes of specific value at specific location in the data field of a frame. The "Data Pattern" field provides 8 data bytes to define the data pattern.
Page 603 ® Protocol analysis R&S CAN and CAN FD (option R&S RTP-K3/K9) 14.5.4 CAN and CAN FD decode results When the configuration of the serial bus is complete, the signal can be decoded: 1. In the "Protocol" dialog > "Setup" tab, enable "Decode". 2.
Page 604 ® Protocol analysis R&S CAN and CAN FD (option R&S RTP-K3/K9) Column Description Actual number of data bytes Data Value of the data frame. The data format is selected below the table. Remote frames do not transmit data, therefore "- - -" is displayed. CRC (hex) Value of the Cyclic Redundance Check (checksum), hexadecimal value Data rate...
Page 605 ® Protocol analysis R&S CAN and CAN FD (option R&S RTP-K3/K9) "Start of frame" Searches for the first edge of the dominant SOF bit (synchronization bit). "Frame type" Searches for a specified frame type (data, remote, error, or overload). For data and remote frames, also the identifier format is considered. For details, see: ●...
Page 606 ® Protocol analysis R&S CAN and CAN FD (option R&S RTP-K3/K9) Remote command: on page 1864 SEARch:TRIGger:CAN[:SSOFrame] on page 1864 SEARch:TRIGger:CAN:SFTYpe on page 1864 SEARch:TRIGger:CAN:SFIDentifier on page 1864 SEARch:TRIGger:CAN:SIDData on page 1865 SEARch:TRIGger:CAN:SERRor on page 1882 SEARch:TRIGger:CAN:SSYMbolic Standard Selects the CAN standard: "CAN", "CAN FD", or "Any". Use "Any" to search for both CAN and CAN-FD frames.
Page 607 ® Protocol analysis R&S CAN and CAN FD (option R&S RTP-K3/K9) FD bits For standard settings "CAN FD" and "Any", you can search for CAN FD-specific bits. The setting is available in CAN FD option R&S RTP-K9. For details, see "FD bits"...
Page 608 ® Protocol analysis R&S CAN and CAN FD (option R&S RTP-K3/K9) 14.5.5.2 Search results To get search results, "Enable" the search. You can minimize, shift or close the search dialog. The search results are listed in the search result table and marked in the waveform by blue lines.
Page 609 ® Protocol analysis R&S CAN and CAN FD (option R&S RTP-K3/K9) 14.5.6.1 Symbolic trigger The "Symbolic" trigger type is available if a DBC label list file is loaded and applied. It allows you to trigger on a specific data message, or a signal and its value that appears inside the message.
Page 610 ® Protocol analysis R&S CAN and CAN FD (option R&S RTP-K3/K9) The setting is used by symbolic trigger and symbolic search. Thus, you always trigger on and search for the same message if symbolic trigger and symbolic search is used at the same time.
Page 611 ® Protocol analysis R&S CAN and CAN FD (option R&S RTP-K3/K9) ● on page 1861 BUS<m>:CAN:FRAMe<n>:SDEXport? 14.5.6.3 Symbolic search Access: 1. Press [Bus]. 2. In the "Setup" tab, set "Protocol = CAN/ CAN-FD". 3. In the "Shortcuts" tab, select "Setup search". 4.
Page 612 ® Protocol analysis R&S CAN and CAN FD (option R&S RTP-K3/K9) Message Sets the message to be triggered or searched for. The setting is used by symbolic trigger and symbolic search. Thus, you always trigger on and search for the same message if symbolic trigger and symbolic search is used at the same time.
Page 613 ® Protocol analysis R&S LIN (option R&S RTP-K3) are shown in a table. You can enable the search zoom window to view the frame with the selected result in more detail. The figure shows the result of a search for an "EngineData" message and the signal "IdleRunning = Running"...
Page 614 ® Protocol analysis R&S LIN (option R&S RTP-K3) ● The identified node sends the message response: one to eight data bytes and one checksum byte. ● Header and response form the message frame. Figure 14-8: LIN frame with header and response The data is transmitted in bytes using the UART byte-word interface without the parity bit.
Page 615 ® Protocol analysis R&S LIN (option R&S RTP-K3) 14.6.2 LIN configuration 14.6.2.1 LIN configuration settings Access: [Bus] > "LIN" > "Setup" tab Make sure that the tab of the correct serial bus is selected. See also: Section 14.1.1, "Setup - general settings", on page 543 LIN standard...
Page 616 ® Protocol analysis R&S LIN (option R&S RTP-K3) Usually, the source is one of the analog channels. Reference and math waveforms are available as source if the trigger source is one of the analog channels but not the serial bus. Alternatively, digital channels can be used if MSO option R&S RTP-B1 is installed.
Page 617 ® Protocol analysis R&S LIN (option R&S RTP-K3) Show thresholds If enabled, the threshold levels are displayed in the diagram. Remote command: on page 1771 BUS<m>:THReshold 14.6.2.2 LIN display Access: [Bus] > "Display" tab. For common display settings, see Section 14.1.3, "Display", on page 545.
Page 618 ® Protocol analysis R&S LIN (option R&S RTP-K3) ● Schedule table ● Signal encoding section ● Encoding to signal mapping Example of a LIN LDF file LIN_description_file; LIN_protocol_version = "2.0"; LIN_language_version = "2.0"; LIN_speed = 19.2 kbps; Nodes { Master: Master1, 10 ms, 0.1 ms; Slaves: Slave_Motor, Slave_Sensor;...
Page 619 ® Protocol analysis R&S LIN (option R&S RTP-K3) 14.6.2.3 Configuring LIN signals For configuration, assign the lines to the input channels, and define the active states and the logical thresholds. For details on configuration settings, see Section 14.6.2.1, "LIN configuration settings", on page 615.
Page 620 ® Protocol analysis R&S LIN (option R&S RTP-K3) Make sure that: ● In the [Bus] > "Setup" tab: – The correct "Protocol" is selected. – The data sources of the serial bus are channel signals. ● In the "Trigger" > "Setup" tab: –...
Page 621 ® Protocol analysis R&S LIN (option R&S RTP-K3) "Identifier + Sets the trigger to a combination of identifier and data condition. The Data" instrument triggers at the end of the last byte of the specified data pattern. The identifier conditions are the same as for the "Identifier" trigger type, see Identifier setup: Condition, Frame ID min, Frame ID max.
Page 622 ® Protocol analysis R&S LIN (option R&S RTP-K3) Identifier OR setup: Monitor, Frame ID Sets the trigger to a combination of up to four identifiers. Enter the patterns in the "Frame ID" fields. In binary and hex format, characters 1, 0, and X (do not care) are allowed.
Page 623 ® Protocol analysis R&S LIN (option R&S RTP-K3) Error conditions Triggers if one or more of the following errors occur: ● Checksum error The checksum verifies the correct data transmission. It is the last byte of the frame response. The checksum includes not only the data but also the protected identifier (PID).
Page 624 ® Protocol analysis R&S LIN (option R&S RTP-K3) For a description of the display settings, see also Section 14.1.3, "Display", on page 545. The instrument captures and decodes the signal according to the standard definition and the configuration settings. The color-coding of the various protocol sections and errors simplifies the interpretation of the visual display.
Page 625 ® Protocol analysis R&S LIN (option R&S RTP-K3) Tools Press "Display settings" in the "Decode Results" table to access the "Display" tab. Remote commands Remote commands are described in Section 26.18.7.3, "Decode results", on page 1893. 14.6.5 Search on decoded LIN data Using the search functionality, you can find various events in the decoded data, the same events which you also can trigger on.
Page 626 ® Protocol analysis R&S LIN (option R&S RTP-K3) "Identifier + Searches for a combination of identifier and data condition. The Data" instrument triggers at the end of the last byte of the specified data pattern. The identifier conditions are the same as for the "Identifier" trigger type, see "Identifier setup: Condition, Frame ID min, Frame ID max"...
Page 627 ® Protocol analysis R&S MIL-1553 (option R&S RTP-K6) Remote command: on page 1904 SEARch:TRIGger:LIN:IDOR<m>:ENABle on page 1904 SEARch:TRIGger:LIN:IDOR<m>[:VALue] Error Condition Selects the error type to be searched for. You can select one or more error types as search condition. The error types are the same as in the LIN trigger setup, see "Error conditions"...
Page 628 ® Protocol analysis R&S MIL-1553 (option R&S RTP-K6) ● Bus Monitor (BM) (optional): listens to all messages and can record selected data for real-time or off-line analysis. The information is transmitted over the bus in defined series of words using Manches- ter code, where each bit is transmitted as high-low for a logical 1 or a low-high for a logical 0.
Page 629 ® Protocol analysis R&S MIL-1553 (option R&S RTP-K6) Status Word Figure 14-12: Structure of a status word The format of a status word consists of the following parts (see Figure 14-12): ● Sync: an invalid Manchester waveform. ● Remote Terminal (RT) Address: the unique address of the corresponding RT. ●...
Page 630 ® Protocol analysis R&S MIL-1553 (option R&S RTP-K6) 14.7.2 MIL-STD-1553 configuration 14.7.2.1 MIL-STD-1553 configuration settings Access: [Bus] > "Decode" tab > "Protocol" = MIL-STD-1553 Access: [Bus] > "MIL-1553" > "Setup" tab Make sure that the tab of the correct serial bus is selected. See also: Section 14.1.1, "Setup - general settings",...
Page 631 ® Protocol analysis R&S MIL-1553 (option R&S RTP-K6) Remote command: on page 1916 BUS<m>:MILStd:POLarity Thresholds Threshold values are used for digitization of the signal. Sets the threshold value for digitization of signals for each line. If the signal value on the line is higher than the threshold, the signal state is high (1 or true for the Boolean logic).
Page 632 ® Protocol analysis R&S MIL-1553 (option R&S RTP-K6) Remote command: on page 1915 BUS<m>:MILStd:MAXResponse:BITS on page 1916 BUS<m>:MILStd:MAXResponse:SELect on page 1926 TRIGger<m>:MILStd:MAXResponse:BITS on page 1926 TRIGger<m>:MILStd:MAXResponse:SELect Show thresholds If enabled, the threshold levels are displayed in the diagram. Remote command: on page 1771 BUS<m>:THReshold 14.7.2.2...
Page 633 ® Protocol analysis R&S MIL-1553 (option R&S RTP-K6) 2. Select the tab of the bus you want to set up, for example "SB1". 3. In the "Setup" tab, select the protocol: "MIL-STD-1553". 4. Tap the "Polarity" button, and select the waveform of the data line. 5.
Page 634 ® Protocol analysis R&S MIL-1553 (option R&S RTP-K6) "Word" Triggers on the selected word type. "Data Word" Triggers on a specified data word or data word range. "Command/ Status Word" Triggers on a specified command word or on a status word. "Command Word"...
Page 635 ® Protocol analysis R&S MIL-1553 (option R&S RTP-K6) "Status Word" Triggers on a specified status word. "Error Condi- Triggers on any combination of protocol errors. tion" Remote command: on page 1919 TRIGger<m>:MILStd:TYPE Sync Type / Word Type Triggers on a sync impulse or word type. You can select to trigger on "Command/ Status", on "All"...
Page 636 ® Protocol analysis R&S MIL-1553 (option R&S RTP-K6) "Condition" Sets the comparison condition to a specific value or a range. "RTA Min/ Specifies the value or sets the start value of a range. RTA" "RTA Max" Sets the maximum value of a range for "Condition" = "In range"/"Out of range".
Page 637 ® Protocol analysis R&S MIL-1553 (option R&S RTP-K6) Remote command: on page 1924 TRIGger<m>:MILStd:DATA:ICONdition on page 1925 TRIGger<m>:MILStd:DATA:IMAX on page 1925 TRIGger<m>:MILStd:DATA:IMIN 11-Bit Information The 11-Bit information sets bits 9 to 19 if there is a command or status word. The 11-Bit information consists of the condition and one or two 11-Bit information patterns.
Page 638 ® Protocol analysis R&S MIL-1553 (option R&S RTP-K6) "Word Count Max" Sets the maximum value of a range for "Condition" = "In range"/"Out of range". Remote command: on page 1920 TRIGger<m>:MILStd:CMD:CCONdition on page 1921 TRIGger<m>:MILStd:CMD:CMAX on page 1921 TRIGger<m>:MILStd:CMD:CMIN T/R (Transmit/receive) Toggles the data direction of the selected command: 1 (transmit), 0 (receive), or X (either).
Page 639 ® Protocol analysis R&S MIL-1553 (option R&S RTP-K6) Check min gap ← Error Condition Checks and sets a value for the intermessage gap between the last bit of a message and the following command word sync. The time is measured between the mid bit zero crossings.
Page 640 ® Protocol analysis R&S MIL-1553 (option R&S RTP-K6) 14.7.4 MIL-STD-1553 decode results When the configuration of the serial bus is complete, the signal can be decoded: 1. In the "Protocol" dialog > "Setup" tab, enable "Decode". 2. In the "Protocol" dialog > "Display" tab, select additional result display settings: "Show decode table"...
Page 641 ® Protocol analysis R&S MIL-1553 (option R&S RTP-K6) To search on decoded data, set the search "Source" to the serial bus that is configured for the protocol to be analyzed. See also Section 11, "Search functions", on page 456. 14.7.5.1 MIL search setup Access: [Bus] >...
Page 642 ® Protocol analysis R&S MIL-1553 (option R&S RTP-K6) Remote terminal address setup: Condition, RTA The remote terminal address setup consists of the condition and one or two RTA pat- terns. The RTA setup settings are the same as in the MIL trigger setup, see "Remote Termi- nal Address"...
Page 643 ® Protocol analysis R&S MIL-1553 (option R&S RTP-K6) Subaddress / Mode setup: Condition, Subaddress min, Subaddress max The subaddress/mode setup consists of the condition and one or two subaddress/ mode patterns. The subaddress/mode setup settings are the same as in the MIL trigger setup, see "Subaddress/ Mode"...
Page 644 ® Protocol analysis R&S ARINC 429 (option R&S RTP-K7) Remote command: on page 1938 SEARch:TRIGger:MILStd:ERRor:MANChester on page 1938 SEARch:TRIGger:MILStd:ERRor:PARity on page 1938 SEARch:TRIGger:MILStd:ERRor:SYNC on page 1938 SEARch:TRIGger:MILStd:ERRor:TIMing 14.7.5.2 MIL search results To get search results, "Enable" the search. You can minimize, shift or close the search dialog.
Page 645 ® Protocol analysis R&S ARINC 429 (option R&S RTP-K7) Word Format Figure 14-13: Structure of an ARINC 429 word An ARINC 429 word is 32-bits and consists of the following parts (see Figure 14-13): ● Parity: the most significant bit (MSB). Checks if there are bit errors during the trans- mission.
Page 646 ® Protocol analysis R&S ARINC 429 (option R&S RTP-K7) See also: Section 14.1.1, "Setup - general settings", on page 543 Data Sets the source of the selected data line. Usually, the source is one of the analog channels. Reference and math waveforms are only available if the trigger source is one of the input channels but not the serial bus.
Page 647 ® Protocol analysis R&S ARINC 429 (option R&S RTP-K7) ● "Find thresholds" Executes the measurement of reference levels and sets the thresholds to the middle reference level of the measured amplitude. Remote command: on page 1945 BUS<m>:ARINc:THReshold:HIGH on page 1945 BUS<m>:ARINc:THReshold:LOW on page 1945 BUS<m>:ARINc:PRESet...
Page 648 ® Protocol analysis R&S ARINC 429 (option R&S RTP-K7) ARINC 429 Specific Label Settings Label lists are protocol-specific. An ARINC 429 label file contains two values for each identifier: ● "Arinc Label": the ARINC 429 label value, that identifies the data type and the parameters associated with it.
Page 649 ® Protocol analysis R&S ARINC 429 (option R&S RTP-K7) 9. Enable "Decode". 14.8.3 ARINC 429 trigger 14.8.3.1 ARINC 429 trigger settings Access: [Bus] > "Shortcuts" tab > "Setup trigger" Make sure that: ● In the [Bus] > "Setup" tab: – The correct "Protocol"...
Page 650 ® Protocol analysis R&S ARINC 429 (option R&S RTP-K7) "Label + Data" Sets the trigger on a defined word format. You can define the label, the data and the SDI / SSM bits separately, see "Label + Data" on page 650. "Error Condition"...
Page 651 ® Protocol analysis R&S ARINC 429 (option R&S RTP-K7) "Label Min" Defines the bit pattern of the label. In binary format, use the following characters: 1; 0; or X (do not care). To enter the pattern in other formats use the bit pattern editor, see Section 14.1.7, "Bit pattern editor", on page 551.
Page 652 ® Protocol analysis R&S ARINC 429 (option R&S RTP-K7) Timing: Min gap, Max gap ← Error Conditions Defines the idle time between two words, which is needed for word synchronization. The beginning of the first bit after the gap marks the start of a new word. You can define a minimum idle time "Min gap", and/or a maximum time "Max gap".
Page 653 ® Protocol analysis R&S ARINC 429 (option R&S RTP-K7) # ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- # Labels for ARINC 429 protocol Column order: Arinc Label, Symbolic Label # ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- # ----Definition---- 001o, Distance to Go 002o, Time to Go 010o, Present Position - Latitude 011o, Present Position - Longitude 014o, Magnetic Heading 015o, Wind Speed...
Page 654 ® Protocol analysis R&S ARINC 429 (option R&S RTP-K7) Table 14-11: Content of the Decode results table Column Description State Overall state of the frame. Start Time of word start in relation to the trigger point Stop Time of word stop in relation to the trigger point Label The value of the label bytes The state of the SDI bits...
Page 655 ® Protocol analysis R&S ARINC 429 (option R&S RTP-K7) Type The search criterion is defined by "Type". All trigger types are also available for search. Additional search parameters are provided under "Detailed Search Parameter Setup". "Word Start" Searches for the start word. "Word Stop"...
Page 656 ® Protocol analysis R&S ARINC 429 (option R&S RTP-K7) The SDI / SSM setup settings are the same as in the ARINC trigger setup, see "SDI / SSM" on page 651. Remote command: on page 1955 SEARch:TRIGger:ARINc:SDI on page 1956 SEARch:TRIGger:ARINc:SSM Error Condition Selects the error type to be searched for.
Page 657 ® Protocol analysis R&S Ethernet 10BASE-T and 100BASE-TX (option R&S RTP-K8) 14.9 Ethernet 10BASE-T and 100BASE-TX (option R&S RTP-K8) Twisted-pair Ethernet technologies are based on the family of standards IEEE 802.3, issued by the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE). R&S RTP-K8 is a firmware option that enables the R&S RTP to analyze Ethernet pro- tocol variants 10BASE-T and 100BASE-TX, by decoding the signal and searching within the decoded events.
Page 658 ® Protocol analysis R&S Ethernet 10BASE-T and 100BASE-TX (option R&S RTP-K8) See also: Section 14.1.1, "Setup - general settings", on page 543 Protocol Defines the protocol type of the selected serial bus. Remote command: on page 1769 BUS<m>:TYPE Decode Enables the decoding of the selected bus. The signal icon of the bus appears on the signal bar.
Page 659 ® Protocol analysis R&S Ethernet 10BASE-T and 100BASE-TX (option R&S RTP-K8) Remote command: on page 1960 BUS<m>:ETHernet:VARiant Source Defines the source settings for the data signal. Permitted source selections are the analog, mathematical, and reference channels. As soon as the serial bus trigger has been selected, the only permitted source selec- tions are the analog channels "C1"...
Page 660 ® Protocol analysis R&S Ethernet 10BASE-T and 100BASE-TX (option R&S RTP-K8) Show thresholds If enabled, the threshold levels are displayed in the diagram. Remote command: on page 1771 BUS<m>:THReshold 14.9.2.2 Ethernet display settings Access: [Bus] > "Display" tab. For common display settings, see Section 14.1.3, "Display", on page 545.
Page 661 ® Protocol analysis R&S Ethernet 10BASE-T and 100BASE-TX (option R&S RTP-K8) #----------------------------------------------------------------------------- # Supported MAC Address Format # xx:xx:xx standard 24 bit manufactory header # xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx/yy support other length headers # yy should be the header length in decimal # yy should be between 24 - 48 # --------------------------------------------------------------------------- 00:00:0C, Cisco 00:01:13, Olympus...
Page 662 ® Protocol analysis R&S Ethernet 10BASE-T and 100BASE-TX (option R&S RTP-K8) Figure 14-14: Decoded Ethernet results with applied label Decode layer Selects the decode layer. Decoding is performed in several steps, and the end results are presented in the decode table. The decode layer selects an interim step for which the decoding result is shown in the honeycomb display.
Page 663 ® Protocol analysis R&S Ethernet 10BASE-T and 100BASE-TX (option R&S RTP-K8) 5. For the variant "10BASE-T", select the polarity ("Normal" or "Inverted") of the data signal. 6. Set the logical thresholds. 7. Enable "Decode". 14.9.3 Ethernet trigger If you need information on how to get started with triggering on Ethernet 10BASE-T signals, see Section 14.9.3.2, "Triggering on Ethernet signals",...
Page 664 ® Protocol analysis R&S Ethernet 10BASE-T and 100BASE-TX (option R&S RTP-K8) "Pattern" Available only for "Variant > 10BASE-T". Sets the trigger to any bit pattern (data) that can be freely specified, starting from the beginning of the frame. The trigger instant is after the last bit of the specified data pattern.
Page 665 ® Protocol analysis R&S Ethernet 10BASE-T and 100BASE-TX (option R&S RTP-K8) Remote command: on page 1960 BUS<m>:ETHernet:VARiant Data Pattern Specifies the data pattern that is to be triggered on. Remote command: on page 1964 TRIGger<m>:ETHernet:PATTern Bit rate Defines the transmission speed setting for the data signal: ●...
Page 666 ® Protocol analysis R&S Ethernet 10BASE-T and 100BASE-TX (option R&S RTP-K8) Remote command: on page 1967 TRIGger<m>:ETHernet:FRAMe:SCONdition on page 1967 TRIGger<m>:ETHernet:FRAMe:SMAX on page 1967 TRIGger<m>:ETHernet:FRAMe:SMIN Length/ Type Defines the length/type field value. "Condition" Sets the operator to trigger on a specific address pattern ("Equal" or "Not equal") or an address range.
Page 667 ® Protocol analysis R&S Ethernet 10BASE-T and 100BASE-TX (option R&S RTP-K8) 14.9.3.2 Triggering on Ethernet signals Prerequisite: A bus is configured for the Ethernet signal to be analyzed. For the basic trigger settings, proceed in the following way: 1. Press the [Bus] key and selet the "Shortcuts" tab. 2.
Page 668 ® Protocol analysis R&S Ethernet 10BASE-T and 100BASE-TX (option R&S RTP-K8) Table 14-12: Content of the Decode results table Column Description State Overall state of the frame: either OK or the relevant error condition (preamble, length) Start Start time of the frame Type Frame type Destination...
Page 669 ® Protocol analysis R&S Ethernet 10BASE-T and 100BASE-TX (option R&S RTP-K8) 14.9.5 Search on decoded Ethernet data Using the search functionality, you can find various events in the decoded data. You can find the same events that you can trigger on, and even many more, since several event types can also be combined.
Page 670 ® Protocol analysis R&S Ethernet 10BASE-T and 100BASE-TX (option R&S RTP-K8) Destination address ← Frame To search for a destination address, an address pattern or optionally an address range have to be specified. Remote command: on page 1975 SEARch:TRIGger:ETHernet:FRAMe:DCONdition on page 1975 SEARch:TRIGger:ETHernet:FRAMe:DMIN on page 1975 SEARch:TRIGger:ETHernet:FRAMe:DMAX...
Page 671 ® Protocol analysis R&S Ethernet 10BASE-T and 100BASE-TX (option R&S RTP-K8) Error Condition Searches for the following error conditions: "Preamble Error" or "Length Error". Preamble Error ← Error Condition Searches for any preamble errors. Remote command: on page 1979 SEARch:TRIGger:ETHernet:ERRor:PREamble Length Error ←...
Page 672 ® Protocol analysis R&S Ethernet 100BASE-T1 (option R&S RTP-K57) ● on page 1982 SEARch:RESult:ETHernet:WORD<m>:DATA? ● on page 1983 SEARch:RESult:ETHernet:WORD<m>:CRC? ● on page 1983 SEARch:RESult:ETHernet:WORD<m>:DSYMbol? ● on page 1983 SEARch:RESult:ETHernet:WORD<m>:SSYMbol? ● on page 1984 SEARch:RESult:ETHernet:WORD<m>:BYTE<n>:VALue? 14.9.5.3 Searching Ethernet data Prerequisite: A serial bus is configured for the Ethernet signal to be decoded and ana- lyzed.
Page 673 ® Protocol analysis R&S Ethernet 100BASE-T1 (option R&S RTP-K57) BroadR-Reach is a Broadcom® point-to-point Ethernet physical layer (PHY) technol- ogy. Therefore, 100BASE-T1 is also known as BroadR-Reach Physical Layer (BR- PHY) or Open Alliance BroadR-Reach PHY (OABR PHY). For more details on the spe- cifications, refer to http://www.opensig.org/about/specifications/.
Page 674 ® Protocol analysis R&S Ethernet 100BASE-T1 (option R&S RTP-K57) In terms of the trigger and decoder development, multiple aspects of this protocol are new, specifically: ● Sidestream descrambler: Descrambles the randomized sequence of received ter- nary symbols ● 1D PAM-3 decoder: Decodes the received ternary symbols into groups of three bits according to a conversion chart ●...
Page 675 ® Protocol analysis R&S Ethernet 100BASE-T1 (option R&S RTP-K57) Forward Defines the forward signal settings. You can choose between a differential and single-ended signal and set the forward source channel for the waveform. Only analog channels are available for selection. Remote command: on page 1986 BUS<m>:HBTO:FTYP...
Page 676 ® Protocol analysis R&S Ethernet 100BASE-T1 (option R&S RTP-K57) "Find thresh- Executes the measurement of reference levels and sets the thresh- olds" olds to the middle reference level of the measured amplitude. Remote command: on page 1987 BUS<m>:HBTO:THReshold on page 1770 BUS<m>:SETReflevels on page 1770 BUS<m>:FAUToset...
Page 677 ® Protocol analysis R&S Ethernet 100BASE-T1 (option R&S RTP-K57) To enhance the decode possibilities of the 100BASE-T1 protocol, you can use an addi- tional setting in the "Display" tab: "Decode layer". 100BASE-T1 Specific Symbol Settings Label lists are protocol-specific. Label lists for 100BASE-T1 are available in CSV and PTT format.
Page 678 ® Protocol analysis R&S Ethernet 100BASE-T1 (option R&S RTP-K57) 14.10.2.4 Configuring 100BASE-T1 signals For configuration, assign the lines to the input channels and define the active states and the logical thresholds. For details on configuration settings, see Section 14.10.2.1, "100BASE-T1 configura- tion settings", on page 674.
Page 679 ® Protocol analysis R&S Ethernet 100BASE-T1 (option R&S RTP-K57) Make sure that: ● In the [Bus] > "Setup" tab: – The correct "Protocol" is selected. – The data sources of the serial bus are channel signals. ● In the "Trigger" > "Setup" tab: –...
Page 680 ® Protocol analysis R&S Ethernet 100BASE-T1 (option R&S RTP-K57) IDLE ← Type Triggers on an idle frame. The frame is used for clock synchronization. Error ← Type Triggers on the specified error frame. Trigger level Sets a trigger level. Remote command: on page 1996 TRIGger<m>:HBTO:TRGLevel User Manual 1803.6484.02 ─...
Page 681 ® Protocol analysis R&S Ethernet 100BASE-T1 (option R&S RTP-K57) Destination address Sets the specified destination address to be triggered on. The destination address setup consists of the condition and one or two data patterns. The destination address corresponds to the address of the interface in the device that receives the frame.
Page 682 ® Protocol analysis R&S Ethernet 100BASE-T1 (option R&S RTP-K57) The value in this field indicates the manner in which the field is being used, either as a length or type field. As a length field, the value in the field indicates the number of logi- cal link control (LLC) data octets that follow in the data field of the frame.
Page 683 ® Protocol analysis R&S Ethernet 100BASE-T1 (option R&S RTP-K57) "Data Min/Data" Defines the bit pattern of the data pattern. In binary format, use the following characters: 1; 0; or X (do not care). To enter the pattern in other formats use the bit pattern editor, see Section 14.1.7, "Bit pattern editor", on page 551.
Page 684 ® Protocol analysis R&S Ethernet 100BASE-T1 (option R&S RTP-K57) 14.10.3.2 Triggering on 100BASE-T1 Prerequisite: A bus is configured for the 100BASE-T1 signal to be analyzed. For the basic trigger settings, proceed in the following way: 1. Press the [Bus] key and selet the "Shortcuts" tab. 2.
Page 685 ® Protocol analysis R&S Ethernet 100BASE-T1 (option R&S RTP-K57) Table 14-13: Content of the Decode results table Column Description Frame Frame count State Overall state of the frame: either OK or the relevant error condition (preamble, CRC or SFD) Start Start time of the frame Type Type of frame (e.g.
Page 686 ® Protocol analysis R&S Ethernet 100BASE-T1 (option R&S RTP-K57) 14.10.5 Search on decoded 100BASE-T1 data Using the search functionality, you can find various events in the decoded data. You can find the same events that you can trigger on, and even many more, since several event types can also be combined.
Page 687 ® Protocol analysis R&S Ethernet 100BASE-T1 (option R&S RTP-K57) IDLE ← Type Searches for an idle frame. The frame is used for clock synchronization. Error ← Type Searches for the specified error frame. Destination address Sets the specified destination address to be searched for. The destination address setup consists of the condition and one or two data patterns.
Page 688 ® Protocol analysis R&S Ethernet 100BASE-T1 (option R&S RTP-K57) Length/Type Sets the specified Length/Type to be searched for. The Length/Type setup consists of the condition and one or two data patterns. The value in this field indicates the manner in which the field is being used, either as a length or type field.
Page 689 ® Protocol analysis R&S Ethernet 100BASE-T1 (option R&S RTP-K57) "Condition" Defines the operator to set a specific data, e.g. "Equal" or "Not Equal") or a range. "Data Min/Data" Defines the bit pattern of the data pattern. In binary format, use the following characters: 1; 0; or X (do not care). To enter the pattern in other formats use the bit pattern editor, see Section 14.1.7, "Bit pattern editor",...
Page 690 ® Protocol analysis R&S Ethernet 100BASE-T1 (option R&S RTP-K57) Remote command: on page 2010 SEARch:TRIGger:HBTO:ERRor:SFD 14.10.5.2 100BASE-T1 search results To get search results, "Enable" the search. You can minimize, shift or close the search dialog. The search results are listed in the search result table and marked in the waveform by blue lines.
Page 691 ® Protocol analysis R&S Ethernet 1000BASE-T1 (option R&S RTP-K58) 14.11 Ethernet 1000BASE-T1 (option R&S RTP-K58) 1000BASE-T1 is a single pair Ethernet based protocol specialized for the needs of the automotive industry, such as in the automotive networking applications, enabling advanced safety, comfort and infotainment features within the automobile. Its specifica- tions is reference to IEEE P802.3bp.
Page 692 ® Protocol analysis R&S Ethernet 1000BASE-T1 (option R&S RTP-K58) Make sure that the tab of the correct serial bus is selected. See also: Section 14.1.1, "Setup - general settings", on page 543 Forward Defines the forward signal settings. You can choose between a differential and single-ended signal and set the source channel for the waveform.
Page 693 ® Protocol analysis R&S Ethernet 1000BASE-T1 (option R&S RTP-K58) on page 2018 BUS<m>:TBTO:RDAP on page 2018 BUS<m>:TBTO:RDAM Reverse attenuation Sets the attenuation factor. It is used to de-amplify the reverse signal before subtract- ing it from the forward signal. The effective signal amplitude passed to the decoder is: Remote command: on page 2016 BUS<m>:TBTO:ATTN...
Page 694 ® Protocol analysis R&S Ethernet 1000BASE-T1 (option R&S RTP-K58) 1000BASE-T1 Specific Label Settings Label lists are protocol-specific. Label lists for 1000BASE-T1 are available in CSV and PTT format. A 1000BASE-T1 label file contains two values for each ethernet header: ● Ethernet header display ●...
Page 695 ® Protocol analysis R&S Ethernet 1000BASE-T1 (option R&S RTP-K58) 14.11.2.3 Configuring 1000BASE-T1 signals For configuration, assign the lines to the input channels and define the active states and the logical thresholds. Serial bus setup 1. Press the [Bus] key on the front panel. 2.
Page 696 ® Protocol analysis R&S Ethernet 1000BASE-T1 (option R&S RTP-K58) Make sure that: ● In the [Bus] > "Setup" tab: – The correct "Protocol" is selected. – The data sources of the serial bus are channel signals. ● In the "Trigger" > "Setup" tab: –...
Page 697 ® Protocol analysis R&S Ethernet 1000BASE-T1 (option R&S RTP-K58) IDLE ← Type Triggers on an idle frame. The frame is used for clock synchronization. Error ← Type Triggers on the specified error frame. Trigger level Sets the trigger level. Remote command: on page 2026 TRIGger<m>:TBTO:TRGLevel Destination address...
Page 698 ® Protocol analysis R&S Ethernet 1000BASE-T1 (option R&S RTP-K58) Remote command: on page 2028 TRIGger<m>:TBTO:DADDress:CONDition on page 2029 TRIGger<m>:TBTO:DADDress:MIN on page 2029 TRIGger<m>:TBTO:DADDress:MAX Source address Sets the specified source address to be triggered on. The source address setup con- sists of the condition and one or two data patterns. The source address is the physical address of the device that sends the frame.
Page 699 ® Protocol analysis R&S Ethernet 1000BASE-T1 (option R&S RTP-K58) Frame check Sets the specified frame check to be triggered on. The frame check setup consists of the condition and one or two data patterns. This field contains a value that is used to check the integrity of the various bits in the frame fields (excluding the preamble / SFD).
Page 700 ® Protocol analysis R&S Ethernet 1000BASE-T1 (option R&S RTP-K58) "Index Max" The second index pattern is required to specify a range with condi- tions "In range". Remote command: on page 2030 TRIGger<m>:TBTO:DATA:ICONdition on page 2031 TRIGger<m>:TBTO:DATA:IMIN on page 2031 TRIGger<m>:TBTO:DATA:IMAX Errors Sets the type of error events to be triggered on.
Page 701 ® Protocol analysis R&S Ethernet 1000BASE-T1 (option R&S RTP-K58) 14.11.3.2 Triggering on 1000BASE-T1 Prerequisite: A bus is configured for the 1000BASE-T1 signal to be analyzed. For the basic trigger settings, proceed in the following way: 1. Press the [Bus] key and selet the "Shortcuts" tab. 2.
Page 702 ® Protocol analysis R&S Ethernet 1000BASE-T1 (option R&S RTP-K58) The results are shown in two tables: ● "Decode results": contains information about all decoded frames ● "Details frame": contains more detailed information about the selected frame in the "Decode results" table. Table 14-15: Content of the Decode results table Column Description...
Page 703 ® Protocol analysis R&S Ethernet 1000BASE-T1 (option R&S RTP-K58) For general information on how to handle the search functionality, see Section 11, "Search functions", on page 456. 14.11.5.1 1000BASE-T1 search setup Access: [Bus] > "Shortcuts" tab > "Setup search" Search criteria Use the "Search criteria"...
Page 704 ® Protocol analysis R&S Ethernet 1000BASE-T1 (option R&S RTP-K58) IDLE ← Type Searches for an idle frame. The frame is used for clock synchronization. Error ← Type Searches for the specified error frame. Destination address Sets the specified destination address to be searched for. The destination address setup consists of the condition and one or two data patterns.
Page 705 ® Protocol analysis R&S Ethernet 1000BASE-T1 (option R&S RTP-K58) Source address Sets the specified source address to be searched for. The source address setup con- sists of the condition and one or two data patterns. The source address is the physical address of the device that sends the frame. "Condition"...
Page 706 ® Protocol analysis R&S Ethernet 1000BASE-T1 (option R&S RTP-K58) "Condition" Defines the operator to set a specific frame check, e.g. "Equal" or "Not Equal") or a range. "Data Min/Data" Defines the bit pattern of the frame check pattern. In binary format, use the following characters: 1; 0; or X (do not care). To enter the pattern in other formats use the bit pattern editor, see Section 14.1.7, "Bit pattern editor",...
Page 707 ® Protocol analysis R&S Ethernet 1000BASE-T1 (option R&S RTP-K58) Remote command: on page 2038 SEARch:TRIGger:TBTO:DATA:ICONdition on page 2039 SEARch:TRIGger:TBTO:DATA:IMIN on page 2038 SEARch:TRIGger:TBTO:DATA:IMAX Errors Sets the type of error events to be searched for. RS-FEC error ← Errors Searches for RS-FEC errors. Remote command: on page 2039 SEARch:TRIGger:TBTO:ERRor:FEC...
Page 708 ® Protocol analysis R&S Ethernet 1000BASE-T1 (option R&S RTP-K58) 14.11.5.2 1000BASE-T1 search results To get search results, "Enable" the search. You can minimize, shift or close the search dialog. The search results are listed in the search result table and marked in the waveform by blue lines.
Page 709 ® Protocol analysis R&S RFFE (option R&S RTP-K40) 5. Specify search criteria according to Section 14.11.5, "Search on decoded 1000BASE-T1 data", on page 702. 6. To acquire a waveform, press [Single]. The R&S RTP performs an 1000BASE-T1 decode according to the thresholds and protocol settings of the associated serial bus source (here in our example SB1).
Page 710 ® Protocol analysis R&S RFFE (option R&S RTP-K40) In general, a command sequence consists of: ● Sequence start condition (SSC) Two bits: 1 followed by 0 on SDATA while SCLK is at logic level zero. ● Command frame Consist of a 4-bit sub device address field (SA), followed by 8 command payload bits and a single parity bit.
Page 711 ® Protocol analysis R&S RFFE (option R&S RTP-K40) Within a command sequence, you can trigger on specific parts of the message: – Sub deviceaddress – Byte count – Register address – Data word Search Using the search functionality, you can find various events in the acquired and deco- ded data.
Page 712 ® Protocol analysis R&S RFFE (option R&S RTP-K40) See also: Section 14.1.1, "Setup - general settings", on page 543 Version Selects the RFFE version. Supported are 1.x, 2.0, 2.1 and 3.0/3.1. Remote command: on page 2053 BUS<m>:RFFE:VERSion Read mode Selects, if the standard or synchronous read ("sRead") mode is used. Available for "Version"...
Page 713 ® Protocol analysis R&S RFFE (option R&S RTP-K40) "Find thresh- Executes the measurement of reference levels and sets the thresh- olds" olds to the middle reference level of the measured amplitude. Remote command: on page 2051 BUS<m>:RFFE:CLOCk:THReshold:HIGH on page 2051 BUS<m>:RFFE:CLOCk:THReshold:LOW on page 2050 BUS<m>:RFFE:DATA:THReshold:HIGH...
Page 714 ® Protocol analysis R&S RFFE (option R&S RTP-K40) You can define a "Min gap time". The standard defines a minimum of 10 ns to separate two subsequent command sequences. Remote command: on page 2052 BUS<m>:RFFE:MINGap:SELect on page 2053 BUS<m>:RFFE:MINGap:TIME 14.12.2.3 Configuring RFFE signals For details on configuration settings, see Section 14.12.2.1, "RFFE configuration set-...
Page 715 ® Protocol analysis R&S RFFE (option R&S RTP-K40) Make sure that: ● In the [Bus] > "Setup" tab: – The correct "Protocol" is selected. – The data sources of the serial bus are channel signals. ● In the "Trigger" > "Setup" tab: –...
Page 716 ® Protocol analysis R&S RFFE (option R&S RTP-K40) Register 0 Write ← Type Triggers on "Register 0 Write" command sequences. This sequence sends 7 data bits in the command payload. You can refine the trigger condition: ● Set a sub device address condition to trigger only on command sequences that are sent to the specified sub devices.
Page 717 ® Protocol analysis R&S RFFE (option R&S RTP-K40) Extended Register Read ← Type Triggers on "Extended Register Read" command sequences. This sequence sends the byte count of data frames in the command payload, followed by one address frame with the address of the first extended register, and reads back up to 16 data frames. You can refine the trigger condition using the same settings as for the "Extended Reg- ister Write"...
Page 718 ® Protocol analysis R&S RFFE (option R&S RTP-K40) See: "Data" on page 721. Main Ownership Handover ← Type Available only for "Version"= "2.0"/"2.1". Triggers on "Main Ownership Handover" command sequences. Optionally, you can specify an MID pattern or an MID range to trigger only on com- mand sequences that are sent to these sub devices.
Page 719 ® Protocol analysis R&S RFFE (option R&S RTP-K40) ● Set a register address condition to trigger only on command sequences that write data to the specified register. See: "Address" on page 720 ● Set a data pattern condition to trigger on data patterns expected in the message. See: "Data"...
Page 720 ® Protocol analysis R&S RFFE (option R&S RTP-K40) on page 2062 TRIGger<m>:RFFE:ERRor:NOResponse on page 2063 TRIGger<m>:RFFE:ERRor:USEQuence on page 2063 TRIGger<m>:RFFE:ERRor:GAP on page 2063 TRIGger<m>:RFFE:ERRor:VERSion Sub device addr. /MID Defines the address of the sub device / main ID. The sub device address setup con- sists of the condition and one or two address patterns.
Page 721 ® Protocol analysis R&S RFFE (option R&S RTP-K40) Remote command: on page 2057 TRIGger<m>:RFFE:BCOunt:CONDition on page 2058 TRIGger<m>:RFFE:BCOunt:MIN on page 2058 TRIGger<m>:RFFE:BCOunt:MAX Data Defines the data trigger condition. The data setup consists of the condition and one or two data patterns. To define on which data frames of the sequence you want to trigger, use the Index set-...
Page 722 ® Protocol analysis R&S RFFE (option R&S RTP-K40) "Mask (Min)" Defines the mask pattern for all operators that require one pattern. "Mask (Max)" Defines the second mask pattern that is required to specify a range with conditions "In range" and "Out of range". Remote command: on page 2061 TRIGger<m>:RFFE:MASK:CONDition...
Page 723 ® Protocol analysis R&S RFFE (option R&S RTP-K40) Example: RFFE label list file # Labels for RFFE protocol Column order: SID, SID text, Address, Address text # --------------------------------------------------------------------------- @PROTOCOL_NAME = rffe 0x01,LM8335 0x01,LM8335,0x00,CMTL_REG 0x01,LM8335,0x01,GPO_PULL_DIR 0x01,LM8335,0x02,GPO_PULL_ENABLE 0x01,LM8335,0x03,GPO_OUT_HIGH_CFG 0x01,LM8335,0x04,GPO_OUT_MASK 0x01,LM8335,0x05,GPO_OUT_DATA 0x01,LM8335,0x1C,PM_TRIG 0x01,LM8335,0x1D,PROD_ID 0x01,LM8335,0x1E,MAN_ID 0x01,LM8335,0x1F,USID_REG 0x05,LM3279...
Page 724 ® Protocol analysis R&S RFFE (option R&S RTP-K40) Decode Results Table The results are shown in two tables: ● "Decode results": contains information about all decoded frames ● "Details frame": contains more detailed information about the selected frame in the "Decode results"...
Page 725 ® Protocol analysis R&S RFFE (option R&S RTP-K40) 14.12.6 Search on decoded RFFE data Using the search functionality, you can find various events in the decoded data, the same events which you also can trigger on. Before you can start the search, you have to configure the bus correctly and acquire decoded data.
Page 726 ® Protocol analysis R&S RFFE (option R&S RTP-K40) "Register Write" Searches for Register Write command sequences. Additional search parameters: ● Sub device address, see "Sub device addr." on page 727 ● Register address, see "Address" on page 727 ● Data pattern, see "Data"...
Page 727 ® Protocol analysis R&S RFFE (option R&S RTP-K40) "Main device Ownership Handover" Searches for Main device Ownership Handover command sequen- ces. Additional search parameters: ● Address of the BOM-to-be, see "Sub device addr." on page 727 ● Data pattern of the confirmation sequence of the new BOM, see "Data"...
Page 728 ® Protocol analysis R&S RFFE (option R&S RTP-K40) Data Searches for a data pattern or a data word range. The setting is available for all "Extended Register" command sequences, which can transfer more than one data frame. The data settings are the same as in the RFFE trigger setup, see "Data"...
Page 729 ® Protocol analysis R&S RFFE (option R&S RTP-K40) Remote commands: ● on page 2077 SEARch:RESult:RFFE:FCOunt? ● on page 2077 SEARch:RESult:RFFE:SEQuence<m>:TYPE? ● on page 2078 SEARch:RESult:RFFE:SEQuence<m>:STATe? ● on page 2078 SEARch:RESult:RFFE:SEQuence<m>:STARt? ● on page 2079 SEARch:RESult:RFFE:SEQuence<m>:STOP? ● on page 2078 SEARch:RESult:RFFE:SEQuence<m>:SADD? ●...
Page 730 ® Protocol analysis R&S D-PHY (option R&S RTP-K42) For information on how to configure the search results presentation and how to navi- gate the search results, see also "To display search zoom windows" on page 479. 14.13 D-PHY (option R&S RTP-K42) The D-PHY is a specification developed by the Mobile Industry Processor Interface (MIPI) alliance as a standard for the communication of high-speed components, like cameras and displays, within mobile devices.
Page 731 ® Protocol analysis R&S D-PHY (option R&S RTP-K42) See also: Section 14.1.1, "Setup - general settings", on page 543 Variant Selects the protocol running on the interface. You can select between the Display Serial Interface (DSI) and Camera Serial Interface (CSI-2). Remote command: on page 2084 BUS<m>:DPHY:VARiant...
Page 732 ® Protocol analysis R&S D-PHY (option R&S RTP-K42) DP0/DN0 ← Source Connection Selects the source of the low-power data lanes. The "DP0" lane has to be present all the time, hence "Source DP0">"None" is not allowed. Remote command: on page 2085 BUS<m>:DPHY:DPZero:SOURce on page 2085 BUS<m>:DPHY:DNZero:SOURce...
Page 733 ® Protocol analysis R&S D-PHY (option R&S RTP-K42) Remote command: on page 2086 BUS<m>:DPHY:CP:HSPeed:HYSTeresis on page 2086 BUS<m>:DPHY:DPZero:HSPeed:HYSTeresis on page 2086 BUS<m>:DPHY:DPONe:HSPeed:HYSTeresis on page 2086 BUS<m>:DPHY:DPTWo:HSPeed:HYSTeresis on page 2086 BUS<m>:DPHY:DPTHree:HSPeed:HYSTeresis Low power thresholds ← Set thresholds Sets the thresholds for the low-power mode. DP0 High / DN0 High ←...
Page 734 ® Protocol analysis R&S D-PHY (option R&S RTP-K42) "HS Burst Bits" The filtered high-speed bits of each lane , including only bits that are part of a burst. "HS Burst Words" 8 bits per word in a high-speed burst of each lane. "HS Merged The words from the previous layer after they have been merged into Bytes"...
Page 735 ® Protocol analysis R&S D-PHY (option R&S RTP-K42) In this section, all trigger settings are described. Their availability on the instrument depends on the selected USB protocol type and trigger type. The user interface of the instrument displays only appropriate settings and guides you through the trigger setup. For a list of supported trigger conditions, refer to the specifications document.
Page 736 ® Protocol analysis R&S D-PHY (option R&S RTP-K42) HS Start of Packet ← Type Sets the trigger to the transmission start of a high-speed packet. HS End of Packet ← Type Sets the trigger to the transmission end of a high-speed packet. HS Packet Header ←...
Page 737 ® Protocol analysis R&S D-PHY (option R&S RTP-K42) LP Escape Mode ← Type Sets the trigger to an escape mode event. LP Lane Turnaround ← Type Sets the trigger to a low-power turnaround, a reversion of the transmission direction. LP HS Request ← Type Sets the trigger to a high-speed request.
Page 738 ® Protocol analysis R&S D-PHY (option R&S RTP-K42) Virtual Channel Triggers on a specific virtual channel, an independent data stream for up to four periph- erals. Remote command: on page 2093 TRIGger<m>:DPHY:HSVC Data Type Sets the specified data type to be triggered on. The data type setup consists of the condition and one or two data patterns.
Page 739 ® Protocol analysis R&S D-PHY (option R&S RTP-K42) "Data Min/ Specifies the value or sets the start value of a range. Data" Sets the maximum value of a range for "Condition" = "In range"/"Out "Data Max" of range". Remote command: For "Type">"HS Data": on page 2088 TRIGger<m>:DPHY:DATA:CONDition...
Page 740 ® Protocol analysis R&S D-PHY (option R&S RTP-K42) Remote command: on page 2091 TRIGger<m>:DPHY:ESCMode:CONDition on page 2091 TRIGger<m>:DPHY:ESCMode:MAX on page 2091 TRIGger<m>:DPHY:ESCMode:MIN 14.13.3.2 Triggering on D-PHY Prerequisite: A bus is configured for the D-PHY signal to be analyzed. For the basic trigger settings, proceed in the following way: 1.
Page 741 ® Protocol analysis R&S D-PHY (option R&S RTP-K42) Decode Results Table The results are shown in two tables: ● "Decode results": contains information about all decoded frames ● "Details frame": contains more detailed information about the selected frame in the "Decode results"...
Page 742 ® Protocol analysis R&S D-PHY (option R&S RTP-K42) For general information on how to handle the search functionality, see Section 11, "Search functions", on page 456. 14.13.5.1 D-PHY search setup Access: [Bus] > "Shortcuts" tab > "Setup search" Type Searches for the selected D-PHY type. Remote command: on page 2101 SEARch:TRIGger:DPHY:TYPE...
Page 743 ® Protocol analysis R&S D-PHY (option R&S RTP-K42) Remote command: on page 2108 SEARch:TRIGger:DPHY:HSVC Data Type Searches for a specific data type. The data type setup consists of the condition and one or two data patterns. "Condition" Defines the operator to set a specific data type ("Equal" or "Not equal") or a data type range.
Page 744 ® Protocol analysis R&S D-PHY (option R&S RTP-K42) "Data Min/Data" Defines the bit pattern of the data value pattern. In binary format, use the following characters: 1; 0; or X (do not care). To enter the pattern in other formats use the bit pattern editor, see Section 14.1.7, "Bit pattern editor", on page 551.
Page 745 ® Protocol analysis R&S D-PHY (option R&S RTP-K42) "Data Max" The second data pattern is required to specify a range with conditions "In range" and "Out of range". Remote command: on page 2105 SEARch:TRIGger:DPHY:ESCMode:CONDition on page 2105 SEARch:TRIGger:DPHY:ESCMode:MAX on page 2105 SEARch:TRIGger:DPHY:ESCMode:MIN 14.13.5.2 D-PHY search results...
Page 746 ® Protocol analysis R&S M-PHY and USB SSIC (option R&S RTP-K44 and K64) 4. Tap "Source" and select the serial bus that is set to D-PHY (e.g. "SB1", unless already selected). 5. Specify search criteria according to Section 14.13.5.1, "D-PHY search setup", on page 742.
Page 747 ® Protocol analysis R&S M-PHY and USB SSIC (option R&S RTP-K44 and K64) 14.14.1 M-PHY basic This chapter provides an overview of the characteristics of the M-PHY and UniPro pro- tocols. 14.14.1.1 Data transfer M-PHY words are always 10 bits long (both data and control words). For UniPro, they have variable lengths that depend on the frame type.
Page 748 ® Protocol analysis R&S M-PHY and USB SSIC (option R&S RTP-K44 and K64) ● Stage 4: merges the data lanes and finalizes the decoding to the UniPro data frames. This stage involves the Lane Merger, PDU Sync Detector, Shift Decode and Dynamic Data unit Decoder.
Page 749 ® Protocol analysis R&S M-PHY and USB SSIC (option R&S RTP-K44 and K64) Lanes Sets the number of logical lanes that are mapped to the physical lines. You can select up to four lanes. Remote command: on page 2115 BUS<m>:MPHY:DLANes Lane 0 / Lane 1 / Lane 2 / Lane 3: Channel Select the signal sources for the logical lanes.
Page 750 ® Protocol analysis R&S M-PHY and USB SSIC (option R&S RTP-K44 and K64) on page 2116 BUS<m>:MPHY:DTHRee:THReshold on page 2116 BUS<m>:MPHY:THCoupling Scrambled Mode Available, if "Variant" = "SSIC". Selects, if the SSIC data is scrambled or descrambled. Set this parameter according to your signal parameters, to ensure a proper decoding.
Page 751 ® Protocol analysis R&S M-PHY and USB SSIC (option R&S RTP-K44 and K64) 1. Press [Bus] on the front panel. 2. Select the tab of the bus you want to set up, for example "SB1". 3. In the "Setup" tab, select the protocol: M-PHY. 4.
Page 752 ® Protocol analysis R&S M-PHY and USB SSIC (option R&S RTP-K44 and K64) Remote command: on page 2119 TRIGger<m>:MPHY:TYPE Start of frame ← Type Triggers on the start of an M-PHY or a UniPro frame. Burst ← Type Triggers on an M-PHY burst frame. Adapt ←...
Page 753 ® Protocol analysis R&S M-PHY and USB SSIC (option R&S RTP-K44 and K64) DL PDU COF ← Type Triggers on a UniPro DL PDU Continuation Of Pre-empted Frame (COF) that matches the specified: ● Prepare length ● ● Data ● Index DL PDU EOF ←...
Page 754 ® Protocol analysis R&S M-PHY and USB SSIC (option R&S RTP-K44 and K64) DL PDU NAC ← Type Triggers on a UniPro DL PDU Negative Acknowledgment Control (NAC) frame that matches the specified conditions: ● Prepare length ● RReq ● DL PDU AFC ←...
Page 755 ® Protocol analysis R&S M-PHY and USB SSIC (option R&S RTP-K44 and K64) PACP ← Type Triggers on a UniPro PHY Adapter Control Protocol (PACP) frame that matches the specified condition: ● Prepare length ● PACP Begin ● PACP Function ID ●...
Page 756 ® Protocol analysis R&S M-PHY and USB SSIC (option R&S RTP-K44 and K64) Trigger Upr0 ← Type Triggers on a UniPro Trigger Upper0 frame. This control frame is used for link startup sequence. Trigger Upr1 ← Type Triggers on a UniPro Trigger Upper1 frame. This control frame is used for link startup sequence.
Page 757 ® Protocol analysis R&S M-PHY and USB SSIC (option R&S RTP-K44 and K64) Prepare length Sets the prepare length. LCC Type Selects the type of LCC command to be triggered on. "Any LCC Command" All the available LCC commands "HIBERN8-SLEEP" Switches the power-saving state to ultra-low power without configura- tion loss.
Page 758 ® Protocol analysis R&S M-PHY and USB SSIC (option R&S RTP-K44 and K64) "Reserved" Reserved bit command. These bits are reserved for future use. Remote command: on page 2119 TRIGger<m>:MPHY:LCCType WORD 1/WORD 2/WORD 3/WORD 4 Sets the specified words to be triggered on. The setup for a word consists of the condi- tion and one or two word patterns.
Page 759 ® Protocol analysis R&S M-PHY and USB SSIC (option R&S RTP-K44 and K64) Data Sets the data to be triggered on. The trigger data setup consists of a comparison con- dition and one or two data patterns. "Condition" Sets the comparison condition to a specific value or a range. "Data Min/Data"...
Page 760 ® Protocol analysis R&S M-PHY and USB SSIC (option R&S RTP-K44 and K64) Remote command: on page 2127 TRIGger<m>:MPHY:FSNumber:CONDition on page 2127 TRIGger<m>:MPHY:FSNumber:MIN on page 2127 TRIGger<m>:MPHY:FSNumber:MAX Sets the specified Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) to be triggered on. The CRC setup consists of the condition and one or two CRC patterns.
Page 761 ® Protocol analysis R&S M-PHY and USB SSIC (option R&S RTP-K44 and K64) "Data Min/Data" Defines the bit pattern of the credit pattern. In binary format, use the following characters: 1; 0; or X (do not care). To enter the pattern in other formats use the bit pattern editor, see Section 14.1.7, "Bit pattern editor", on page 551.
Page 762 ® Protocol analysis R&S M-PHY and USB SSIC (option R&S RTP-K44 and K64) Errors Sets the type of error events to be triggered on. Reserved Bit Error ← Errors Triggers on reserved bit error. This error means that the waveform violates the reserved field according to the specifi- cation.
Page 763 ® Protocol analysis R&S M-PHY and USB SSIC (option R&S RTP-K44 and K64) 4. Tap "Serial bus" and select the serial bus that is set to M-PHY, e.g.: The "Protocol" selection is then automatically set to "M-PHY". 5. Select the "Type" to use in the M-PHY protocol analysis. 6.
Page 764 ® Protocol analysis R&S M-PHY and USB SSIC (option R&S RTP-K44 and K64) Remote command: on page 2164 TRIGger<m>:MPHY:SSIC:ERENable on page 2164 TRIGger<m>:MPHY:SSIC:ERRor<n>:ENABle Set details Opens a dialog to define frame specific settings. AND / Field name / Condition ← Set details This table lists the field numbers and names in the selected frame together with a sum- mary of the user settings of checking conditions for each field and a checkbox to enable the checking.
Page 765 ® Protocol analysis R&S M-PHY and USB SSIC (option R&S RTP-K44 and K64) Remote command: on page 2166 TRIGger<m>:MPHY:SSIC:DOPerator on page 2166 TRIGger<m>:MPHY:SSIC:FRAMe<n>:FLD<o>:DOPerator on page 2166 TRIGger<m>:MPHY:SSIC:DMIN on page 2166 TRIGger<m>:MPHY:SSIC:FRAMe<n>:FLD<o>:DMIN on page 2165 TRIGger<m>:MPHY:SSIC:DMAX on page 2165 TRIGger<m>:MPHY:SSIC:FRAMe<n>:FLD<o>:DMAX BitState Defines the bit state to be checked for the selected field.
Page 766 ® Protocol analysis R&S M-PHY and USB SSIC (option R&S RTP-K44 and K64) For details, see Section 14.14.3.3, "SSIC trigger settings", on page 763. 14.14.4 M-PHY decode results When the configuration of the serial bus is complete, the signal can be decoded: 1.
Page 767 ® Protocol analysis R&S M-PHY and USB SSIC (option R&S RTP-K44 and K64) Column Description Numeric Hexadecimal value of the field Formatted Formatted content of the field Tools Press "Display settings" in the "Decode Results" table to access the "Display" tab. Remote commands Remote commands are described in Section 26.18.15.3, "Decode results...
Page 768 ® Protocol analysis R&S M-PHY and USB SSIC (option R&S RTP-K44 and K64) Remote command: on page 2142 SEARch:TRIGger:MPHY:TYPE Start of frame ← Type Searches for the start of an M-PHY or a UniPro frame. Burst ← Type Searches for an M-PHY burst. Adapt ←...
Page 769 ® Protocol analysis R&S M-PHY and USB SSIC (option R&S RTP-K44 and K64) Trigger Upper1 ← Type Searches for a Trigger Upper1 frame. This control frame is used for link startup sequence. Trigger Upper2 ← Type Searches for a Trigger Upper2 frame. This control frame is used for link startup sequence.
Page 770 ® Protocol analysis R&S M-PHY and USB SSIC (option R&S RTP-K44 and K64) "Data Min/Data" Defines the bit pattern of the word pattern. In binary format, use the following characters: 1; 0; or X (do not care). To enter the pattern in other formats use the bit pattern editor, see Section 14.1.7, "Bit pattern editor", on page 551.
Page 771 ® Protocol analysis R&S M-PHY and USB SSIC (option R&S RTP-K44 and K64) "Data Max" The second data pattern is required to specify a range with conditions "In range" and "Out of range". Remote command: on page 2148 SEARch:TRIGger:MPHY:DATA:DCONdition on page 2148 SEARch:TRIGger:MPHY:DATA:DMIN on page 2149 SEARch:TRIGger:MPHY:DATA:DMAX...
Page 772 ® Protocol analysis R&S M-PHY and USB SSIC (option R&S RTP-K44 and K64) "Condition" Defines the operator to set a specific CRC, e.g. "Equal" or "Not Equal" or a range. "Data Min/Data" Defines the bit pattern of the CRC pattern. In binary format, use the following characters: 1;...
Page 773 ® Protocol analysis R&S M-PHY and USB SSIC (option R&S RTP-K44 and K64) Remote command: on page 2153 SEARch:TRIGger:MPHY:CREDit:CONDition on page 2154 SEARch:TRIGger:MPHY:CREDit:MIN on page 2154 SEARch:TRIGger:MPHY:CREDit:MAX PACP Begin Sets the specified PACP Begin to be searched for. The PACP Begin setup consists of the condition and one or two PACP Begin patterns.
Page 774 ® Protocol analysis R&S M-PHY and USB SSIC (option R&S RTP-K44 and K64) This error means that the waveform violates the reserved field according to the specifi- cation. For example, a DL_PDU_AFC frame requires that the two bits before and three bits after the FSN field to be reserved and set as 0.
Page 775 ® Protocol analysis R&S M-PHY and USB SSIC (option R&S RTP-K44 and K64) ● on page 2159 SEARch:RESult:MPHY:FRAMe<m>:CELL<n>:DATA? ● on page 2159 SEARch:RESult:MPHY:FRAMe<m>:CELL<n>:TYPE? ● on page 2159 SEARch:RESult:MPHY:FRAMe<m>:CELL<n>:STARt? ● on page 2160 SEARch:RESult:MPHY:FRAMe<m>:CELL<n>:STOP? ● on page 2160 SEARch:RESult:MPHY:FRAMe<m>:CELL<n>:STATe? ● on page 2160 SEARch:RESult:MPHY:FRAMe<m>:DATA? ●...
Page 776 ® Protocol analysis R&S Custom: Manchester / NRZ (option R&S RTP-K50) You can define individual search parameters for the fields of the selected frame in the table below the "Search criteria". To specify these parameters, select a field in the table and define the data and/or index operators and values, or the bit state.
Page 777 ® Protocol analysis R&S Custom: Manchester / NRZ (option R&S RTP-K50) 14.15.1 Custom: Manchester / NRZ protocols "Manchester" coding is a self-clocked coding scheme also known as phase-shift keying (or phase encoding, PE). It is used in protocols such as ProfiBus (IEC 61158), DALI (Digital Addressable Lighting Interface, IEC 60929 and IEC 62386), MVB (Multifunction Vehicle Bus, part of IEC 61375 for Train Communication Networks, TCN), and Ethernet 10BASE-T (10 Mbit/s, IEEE 802.3i).
Page 778 ® Protocol analysis R&S Custom: Manchester / NRZ (option R&S RTP-K50) way to automatically discriminate an idling bus from monotonic sequences of "H" or "L" violations. For these biphase situations, R&S RTP-K50 offers a "Gap Time" detection feature, which allows to distinguish long intervals of non-transitions between bus idling and sequences of violations.
Page 779 ® Protocol analysis R&S Custom: Manchester / NRZ (option R&S RTP-K50) Figure 14-17: Coding standard selection in the serial bus protocol configuration dialog See also: Section 14.1.1, "Setup - general settings", on page 543 Coding Standard To define the coding of the custom serial bus to be analyzed, select one of the follow- ing standards: "Manchester"...
Page 780 ® Protocol analysis R&S Custom: Manchester / NRZ (option R&S RTP-K50) The data source for Manchester and NRZ coding standards is selected separately, independent of each other. The data source is set to default upon switching the coding standard. Permitted source selections are: ●...
Page 781 ® Protocol analysis R&S Custom: Manchester / NRZ (option R&S RTP-K50) Data Idle Polarity (NRZ Unclocked) Defines the idle polarity of the custom serial bus data signal (only available for the cod- ing standard "NRZ Unclocked"). The available settings are: "Idle low"...
Page 782 ® Protocol analysis R&S Custom: Manchester / NRZ (option R&S RTP-K50) Clock Phase (NRZ Clocked) Defines the phase of the custom serial bus clock signal for the coding standard "NRZ Clocked", depending on "Clock Polarity". The available settings are: ● "First Edge"...
Page 783 ® Protocol analysis R&S Custom: Manchester / NRZ (option R&S RTP-K50) ● Manchester coding standards use 3-state signals with an upper and a lower volt- age threshold in the range of -25 V to +25 V. A low-to-high transition requires the signal to exceed the upper threshold;...
Page 784 ® Protocol analysis R&S Custom: Manchester / NRZ (option R&S RTP-K50) "Threshold" Directly sets the threshold values. ● For Manchester: upper threshold in the upper field, lower thresh- old in the lower field. ● For NRZ Clocked: clock threshold in the upper field, data thresh- old in the middle field and enable threshold in the lower field.
Page 785 ® Protocol analysis R&S Custom: Manchester / NRZ (option R&S RTP-K50) Autoset Starts software algorithms for determining the signal threshold levels and bitrate. Remote command: on page 1770 BUS<m>:FAUToset Check bit rate Enables the bit rate setting. In most cases, bit rate is recovered from the signal auto- matically.
Page 786 ® Protocol analysis R&S Custom: Manchester / NRZ (option R&S RTP-K50) Min gap time Specifies a minimum gap time (idle time or timeout) between two frames. A gap time definition is optional for the coding standards "Manchester", "Manchester II" and "NRZ Clocked", but obligatory for "NRZ Unclocked"...
Page 787 ® Protocol analysis R&S Custom: Manchester / NRZ (option R&S RTP-K50) Frames A frame format description (or frame description, for short) is represented by one "page" in this dialog. It can be created by clicking on "Add". If one or several frame descriptions already exist, the new frame description is then created at the end of the frame format description list (or frame list, for short).
Page 788 ® Protocol analysis R&S Custom: Manchester / NRZ (option R&S RTP-K50) it overwrites any subsequent frame description. However, instead of using a "catch all" frame description, the built-in "undescribed bits" display as mentioned above may be the better approach to create frame descriptions. It is in the responsibility of the user to define unambiguous settings for each frame type.
Page 789 ® Protocol analysis R&S Custom: Manchester / NRZ (option R&S RTP-K50) Bits This crucial information defines the length of the cell and - based on the previous cells - also the cell end position and the next cell start position within a frame. If, for a given bit count, the Condition value is longer, it is truncated.
Page 790 ® Protocol analysis R&S Custom: Manchester / NRZ (option R&S RTP-K50) "= (equal)" The equal operator (represented by the "=" sign) defines a pattern for the field to match. Valid condition entries are characters that match the cell's defined "Format", "Bit order", and "Bits". In binary format, for example, valid characters are "1", "0", "H"...
Page 791 ® Protocol analysis R&S Custom: Manchester / NRZ (option R&S RTP-K50) "[ ] (array)" The array operator (represented by the "[" and "]" bracket signs) defines the number of permissible repetitions of the cell. Example: Fixed-Length Array: [n] The length parameter "n" is a decimal number > 0, which determines that the cell is repeated n times within the frame.
Page 792 ® Protocol analysis R&S Custom: Manchester / NRZ (option R&S RTP-K50) "crc5usb(n-m)" The crc 5-bit operator performs a check for a 5\-bit CRC function using the polynomial as defined by the USB standard. n and m define the index range for the CRC check. For example, if the CRC shall check fields 1 to 4, the function shall be written "crc5usb(1-5)".
Page 793 ® Protocol analysis R&S Custom: Manchester / NRZ (option R&S RTP-K50) Remote command: on page 2189 BUS<m>:CMSB:FRAMe<n>:CELL<o>:FORMat Bit Order This defines, in which order the bits of a cell's Condition value are evaluated: either the most significant bit (MSB) or the least significant bit (LSB) first. Since the bit order is considered for the interpretation of the condition, you should specify MSB or LSB cor- rectly.
Page 794 ® Protocol analysis R&S Custom: Manchester / NRZ (option R&S RTP-K50) Export Raw Decodes the data and exports the raw data to an excel file. The file is saved under: c:\\Users\\Public\\Documents\\Rohde-Schwarz\\RTx\\ ResultBoxExports\\CustomSBRawBits.csv 14.15.2.5 XML syntax This chapter explains the required grammar and syntax of XML files, which contain cus- tom frames and can be loaded or saved.
Page 795 ® Protocol analysis R&S Custom: Manchester / NRZ (option R&S RTP-K50) Figure 14-18: Example of XML file syntax with three custom frame format descriptions The first out of three XML frames in Figure 14-18 is interpreted by the software in the following way: A suitable XML file as shown in Figure 14-18...
Page 796 ® Protocol analysis R&S Custom: Manchester / NRZ (option R&S RTP-K50) ● "Field Name", in string format. ● "Bit count" specifies the length of bits, in numerical format. ● "Condition" (optional) identifies the bit pattern to match, in string format. ●...
Page 797 ® Protocol analysis R&S Custom: Manchester / NRZ (option R&S RTP-K50) Remote command: on page 2198 BUS<m>:CMSB:FILTer:ENABle Decode layer Selects the decode layer. Decoding is performed in several steps, and the end results are presented in the decode table. The decode layer selects an interim step for which the decoding result is shown in the honeycomb display.
Page 798 ® Protocol analysis R&S Custom: Manchester / NRZ (option R&S RTP-K50) 14.15.3 Custom: Manchester / NRZ trigger If you need information on how to get started with triggering on Custom serial bus sig- nals, see Section 14.15.3.2, "Triggering on custom Manchester / NRZ serial bus", on page 803.
Page 799 ® Protocol analysis R&S Custom: Manchester / NRZ (option R&S RTP-K50) Frame Start ← Type For Manchester and NRZ Clocked coding standards, the frame start trigger is set to the end of the gap time. The start of frame (SOF) condition is the first bit after the gap (timeout).
Page 800 ® Protocol analysis R&S Custom: Manchester / NRZ (option R&S RTP-K50) "Word Length" Sets the number of bits in an NRZ Unclocked word (hence, the size of the data frame). Default word length is 8 bits, permitted lengths range from 0 bits to 31 bits. Note: The NRZ Unclocked coding standard requires a signal that contains both a start bit and a stop bit: ●...
Page 801 ® Protocol analysis R&S Custom: Manchester / NRZ (option R&S RTP-K50) Error types: Item name, Enable ← Advanced The table lists the error types you can trigger on. Select the required errors in the "Enable" column. Available are "CRC" error and "Parity" error. Remote command: on page 2197 TRIGger<m>:CMSB:ADVanced:ERENable...
Page 802 ® Protocol analysis R&S Custom: Manchester / NRZ (option R&S RTP-K50) Select a field in the table to specify the checking conditions for this field in the "Data", "BitState" and/or "Index" dialog (whichever applies). The condition is only applied, and the "Condition"...
Page 803 ® Protocol analysis R&S Custom: Manchester / NRZ (option R&S RTP-K50) 14.15.3.2 Triggering on custom Manchester / NRZ serial bus Prerequisite: A bus is configured for the custom serial bus signal to be analyzed. For the basic trigger settings, proceed in the following way: 1.
Page 804 ® Protocol analysis R&S Custom: Manchester / NRZ (option R&S RTP-K50) Frame type Selects the frame type for the custom bus filtering. You can define individual checking parameters for the fields listed in the "Trigger type dependent settings". To specify these parameters, select a field from this list and define the data and/or index operators and values, or the bit state.
Page 805 ® Protocol analysis R&S Custom: Manchester / NRZ (option R&S RTP-K50) Error types: Item name, Enable The table lists the error types you can filter on. Select the required errors in the "Enable" column. Available are "CRC" error and "Parity" error. Remote command: on page 2199 BUS<m>:CMSB:FILTer:ERRor<n>:ENABle...
Page 806 ® Protocol analysis R&S Custom: Manchester / NRZ (option R&S RTP-K50) Remote command: on page 2202 BUS<m>:CMSB:FILTer:FRAMe<n>:FLD<o>:IMAX on page 2202 BUS<m>:CMSB:FILTer:FRAMe<n>:FLD<o>:IMIN on page 2202 BUS<m>:CMSB:FILTer:FRAMe<n>:FLD<o>:IOPerator 14.15.5 Custom: Manchester / NRZ decode results When the configuration of the serial bus is complete, the signal can be decoded: 1.
Page 807 ® Protocol analysis R&S Custom: Manchester / NRZ (option R&S RTP-K50) Table 14-23: Content of the "Decode results details" table Column Description State Overall state of the cell: either OK or the relevant error condition (e.g. length error) Type The type of frame, as specified with the "Frame type" Numeric Data content of the cell (e.g.
Page 808 ® Protocol analysis R&S Custom: Manchester / NRZ (option R&S RTP-K50) Remote command: on page 2209 SEARch:TRIGger:CMSB:ERRor<m>:ENABle on page 2210 SEARch:TRIGger:CMSB:FIENable on page 2212 SEARch:TRIGger:CMSB:FRAMe<m>:ENABle on page 2210 SEARch:TRIGger:CMSB:FRENable on page 2210 SEARch:TRIGger:CMSB:FRAMe<m>:FLD<n>:BIT on page 2210 SEARch:TRIGger:CMSB:BIT on page 2211 SEARch:TRIGger:CMSB:FRAMe<m>:FLD<n>:DMAX on page 2211 SEARch:TRIGger:CMSB:DMAX...
Page 809 ® Protocol analysis R&S 8b/10b (option R&S RTP-K52) 3. If the dialog box does not contain a search entry, tap the "Add" icon to create one, as described in "To create a user-defined search" on page 471. 4. Specify search criteria according to Section 14.15.6.1, "Custom Manchester / NRZ search setup",...
Page 810 ® Protocol analysis R&S 8b/10b (option R&S RTP-K52) Figure 14-19: Coding scheme of the 8b/10b The additional two bits I and j that join the stream are variable and ensure the running disparity. There are two types of characters used in the 8b/10b coding, special characters Kx.y and data characters Dx.y.
Page 811 ® Protocol analysis R&S 8b/10b (option R&S RTP-K52) See also: Section 14.1.1, "Setup - general settings", on page 543 Signal type Selects the signal type that is used for the decoding. You can choose between a differ- ential and single-ended signal. Remote command: on page 2225 BUS<m>:EBTB:TYPE...
Page 812 ® Protocol analysis R&S 8b/10b (option R&S RTP-K52) Threshold High Sets the threshold high of the signal, if "Signal type" > "Differential". Remote command: on page 2221 BUS<m>:EBTB:DIFFerential:THRHigh Threshold Low Sets the threshold low of the signal, if "Signal type" > "Differential". Remote command: on page 2222 BUS<m>:EBTB:DIFFerential:THRLow...
Page 813 ® Protocol analysis R&S 8b/10b (option R&S RTP-K52) Autoset Starts software algorithms for determining the signal threshold levels and bitrate. Remote command: on page 1770 BUS<m>:FAUToset Sync symbol Selects the sync symbol, a control symbol used for low-level control functions. You can select one of the comma control symbols (K28.1, K28.5, K28.7) used for synchroniza- tion or you can enter a pattern.
Page 814 ® Protocol analysis R&S 8b/10b (option R&S RTP-K52) Display Format Selects the display format for the results of the display table. Remote command: on page 2222 BUS<m>:EBTB:DISF 14.16.2.4 Configuring 8b/10b For configuration, you assign the line to the input channel, set the threshold, the bitrate, and the sync symbol.
Page 815 ® Protocol analysis R&S 8b/10b (option R&S RTP-K52) 14.16.3 8b/10b trigger If you need information on how to get started with triggering on 8b/10b signals, see Section 14.16.3.2, "Triggering on 8b/10b data", on page 818. Otherwise proceed with the 8b/10b trigger settings. 14.16.3.1 8b/10b trigger setup Access: [Bus] >...
Page 816 ® Protocol analysis R&S 8b/10b (option R&S RTP-K52) K/D Codes Symbol ← K/D symbol Selects the control character. Remote command: on page 2227 TRIGger<m>:EBTB:SYMType x value ← K/D symbol Sets the x value of the data character Dx.y to be triggered on, if "K/D symbol" > "Dx.y". Remote command: on page 2226 TRIGger<m>:EBTB:DX...
Page 817 ® Protocol analysis R&S 8b/10b (option R&S RTP-K52) Remote command: on page 2227 TRIGger<m>:EBTB:SYME Error Condition Triggers on the selected error conditions. Disparity error ← Error Condition Triggers on disparity errors. Remote command: on page 2226 TRIGger<m>:EBTB:DISParityerr Glitching error ← Error Condition Triggers on glitch errors.
Page 818 ® Protocol analysis R&S 8b/10b (option R&S RTP-K52) 14.16.3.2 Triggering on 8b/10b data Prerequisite: A bus is configured for the 8b/10b signal to be analyzed. For the basic trigger settings, proceed in the following way: 1. Press the [Bus] key and selet the "Shortcuts" tab. 2.
Page 819 ® Protocol analysis R&S 8b/10b (option R&S RTP-K52) Table 14-24: Content of the decode result table Column Description Symbol Shows the index number of the symbol State Overall state of the symbol Start Time of the symbol start in relation to the trigger point K/D Code The K/D code 8-bit...
Page 820 ® Protocol analysis R&S 8b/10b (option R&S RTP-K52) Type Selects the type of condition to be searched for. Available are: ● "K/D symbol" ● "8 bit pattern" ● "10 bit pattern" ● "Expression" ● "Error Condition" Press "Define search details" to open a dialog for defining search type dependent set- tings.
Page 821 ® Protocol analysis R&S 8b/10b (option R&S RTP-K52) Disparity error Searches for disparity errors. Remote command: on page 2231 SEARch:TRIGger:EBTB:DISParityerr Glitching error Searches for glitching errors. Remote command: on page 2232 SEARch:TRIGger:EBTB:GLITcherror Unknown symbol error Searches for a symbol that is not defined by the the 8b/10b. Remote command: on page 2234 SEARch:TRIGger:EBTB:UNK...
Page 822 ® Protocol analysis R&S MDIO (option R&S RTP-K55) ● on page 2235 SEARch:RESult:EBTB:SYMBol<m>:STOP? 14.16.5.3 Searching 8b/10b data Prerequisite: A serial bus is configured for the 8b/10b signal to be decoded and ana- lyzed. The search for events is set up in the following way: 1.
Page 823 ® Protocol analysis R&S MDIO (option R&S RTP-K55) ● The MDIO protocol....................823 ● MDIO configuration....................824 ● MDIO trigger......................828 ● MDIO decode results.................... 831 ● Search on decoded MDIO data................833 14.17.1 The MDIO protocol MDIO is used for bidirectional transfer of control and status information between the physical layer entity (PHY) and the station management entities (STA).
Page 824 ® Protocol analysis R&S MDIO (option R&S RTP-K55) ● PHYAD = address of a physical layer entity (in Clause 22) ● PRTAD = address of a port (in Clause 45) ● REGAD = register address within a PHY (in Clause 22) ●...
Page 825 ® Protocol analysis R&S MDIO (option R&S RTP-K55) Figure 14-20: Serial bus MDIO protocol configuration dialog See also: Section 14.1.1, "Setup - general settings", on page 543 Source MDIO requires two source channels, one for clock and one for data. "Clock"...
Page 826 ® Protocol analysis R&S MDIO (option R&S RTP-K55) ● Vil(max) is being used for the falling edge evaluation. This "l" (low) threshold is the maximum level for the signal to be identified as "0". If the signal value comes from a high state (hence, falling edge), the state remains to be considered as high ("1"), until it has fallen below Vil(max).
Page 827 ® Protocol analysis R&S MDIO (option R&S RTP-K55) Access: [Bus] > "Display" tab. For common display settings, see Section 14.1.3, "Display", on page 545. MDIO Specific Label Settings Decode layer Selects the decode layer. Decoding is performed in several steps, and the end results are presented in the decode table.
Page 828 ® Protocol analysis R&S MDIO (option R&S RTP-K55) 2. Select the tab of the bus you want to set up, for example "SB1". 3. Select the "Setup" tab. 4. In the "Setup" tab, set the "Protocol" > "MDIO". 5. Select the waveform for the "Clock" and "Data" lines. 6.
Page 829 ® Protocol analysis R&S MDIO (option R&S RTP-K55) Serial bus Selects the serial bus to be triggered on. Make sure to select the correct bus before you enter the settings. To trigger on a serial bus, the signals sources must be channel signals. If the data or clock source is a math or reference waveform, you cannot trigger on that bus.
Page 830 ® Protocol analysis R&S MDIO (option R&S RTP-K55) "Data" Sets the trigger to the data field. For more information on the data condition, see MDIO in the Ethernet standard. The trigger instant is at the end of the frame after the last data bit, as indicated in the GUI. Note: All data triggers are always at the end of the frame, even if the specified pattern to trigger for is at a different position within the data word.
Page 831 ® Protocol analysis R&S MDIO (option R&S RTP-K55) REGAD/DEVAD ← MDIO Trigger Type Sets the register address or device address (5 bits) of the frame pattern; available only in trigger type "Data". Remote command: on page 2241 TRIGger<m>:MDIO:REGI DATA/ADDRESS ← MDIO Trigger Type Defines the payload data pattern or address pattern (16 bits);...
Page 832 ® Protocol analysis R&S MDIO (option R&S RTP-K55) Decode Results Table The "Decode results" table contains information about all decoded frames. Table 14-27: Content of the Decode results table Column Description Frame Number of the acquired frame State of frame, available messages are: State ●...
Page 833 ® Protocol analysis R&S MDIO (option R&S RTP-K55) Remote commands Remote commands to retrieve decode results are described in Section 26.18.18.3, "Decode results", on page 2241. 14.17.5 Search on decoded MDIO data Using the search functionality, you can find various events in the decoded data. You can find the same events that you can trigger on, and even many more, since several event types can also be combined.
Page 834 ® Protocol analysis R&S MDIO (option R&S RTP-K55) Selects the start of frame code of the frame pattern; available only in search criteria type "Data". Permissible frame patterns are: Clause 22, Clause 45, or Any Remote command: on page 2247 SEARch:TRIGger:MDIO:ST Selects the Type of Frame code (or OP code, OpCode, operation code);...
Page 835 ® Protocol analysis R&S USB (option R&S RTP-K60) ● on page 2250 SEARch:RESult:MDIO:WORD<m>:STOP? ● on page 2249 SEARch:RESult:MDIO:WORD<m>:ST? ● on page 2251 SEARch:RESult:MDIO:WORD<m>:TYPE? ● on page 2248 SEARch:RESult:MDIO:WORD<m>:PHYS? ● on page 2249 SEARch:RESult:MDIO:WORD<m>:REGI? ● on page 2248 SEARch:RESult:MDIO:WORD<m>:DATA? ● on page 2251 SEARch:RESult:MDIO:WORD<m>:SYMBol? 14.17.5.3 Searching MDIO data...
Page 836 ® Protocol analysis R&S USB (option R&S RTP-K60) ● The USB protocol....................836 ● USB 2.0 configuration................... 841 ● USB 2.0 trigger......................845 ● USB 2.0 decode results..................854 ● Search on decoded USB 2.0 data.................855 14.18.1 The USB protocol The USB protocol was developed, starting in 1996, by the nonprofit organization USB Implementers Forum, Inc.
Page 837 ® Protocol analysis R&S USB (option R&S RTP-K60) ● Addressing scheme: a maximum of 127 connected devices can be distinguished, because a packet's address field length is limited to 7 bits. USB devices have up to 16 OUT endpoints (from host to device) and up to 16 IN endpoints (from device to host).
Page 838 ® Protocol analysis R&S USB (option R&S RTP-K60) each data packet, but disregard it unless it carries the correct address. In reply, only the addressed device (one at a time) can send data upstream, to the host. The USB architecture supports four different kinds of data transfer: control, bulk, inter- rupt or isochronous transfer.
Page 839 ® Protocol analysis R&S USB (option R&S RTP-K60) The PID's length is 8 bit, beginning (LSB) with the fields PID0, PID1, PID2 and PID3. Those 4 bits are repeated in PID4, PID5, PID6 and PID7, but in complemen- tary form (for integrity checking). The PID is the only part of a packet not to be cov- ered by the CRC (see below).
Page 840 ® Protocol analysis R&S USB (option R&S RTP-K60) Packet Name Meaning type value 0x5A Data not accepted, typically equivalent with some type of EAGAIN, meaning that the data should be resent later STALL 0x1E A severe error has occurred, the target endpoint cannot be addressed until it is explicitly cleared again NYET 0x96...
Page 841 ® Protocol analysis R&S USB (option R&S RTP-K60) ● Data Selection: DATA0, DATA1, DATA2, MDATA, (for USB 1.x only: AND-ing with user defined PID check, payload and CRC values) ● Handshake Packet Setup: Triggering on handshake packet, trigger with specific settings: ACK, NAK, NYET, STALL or ERR handshake packet ●...
Page 842 ® Protocol analysis R&S USB (option R&S RTP-K60) See also: Section 14.1.1, "Setup - general settings", on page 543 Protocol type Defines the USB protocol technology and transmission speed. "USB Low speed" Selects USB 2.0 low speed protocol (1.5 Mbit/s). Figure 14-26: USB low speed protocol configuration User Manual 1803.6484.02 ─...
Page 843 ® Protocol analysis R&S USB (option R&S RTP-K60) "USB Full speed" Selects USB 2.0 full speed protocol (12 Mbit/s). Figure 14-27: USB full speed protocol configuration User Manual 1803.6484.02 ─ 08...
Page 844 ® Protocol analysis R&S USB (option R&S RTP-K60) "USB High speed" Selects USB high-speed protocol (480 Mbit/s). As the signal is differ- ential, there is only one source and one threshold to be defined. Figure 14-28: USB high-speed protocol configuration Remote command: on page 2252 BUS<m>:USB:TECHnology...
Page 845 ® Protocol analysis R&S USB (option R&S RTP-K60) Remote command: on page 2253 BUS<m>:USB:DIFFerential:SOURce Thresholds Sets the threshold value for the digitization of each signal line. If the signal value on the line is higher than the threshold, the signal state is high. Otherwise, if the signal value is below the threshold, the signal state is considered low.
Page 846 ® Protocol analysis R&S USB (option R&S RTP-K60) 14.18.3.1 USB 2.0 trigger settings Access: [Bus] > "Shortcuts" tab > "Setup trigger" In this section, all trigger settings are described. Their availability on the instrument depends on the selected USB 2.0 protocol type and trigger type. The user interface of the instrument displays only appropriate settings and guides you through the trigger setup.
Page 847 ® Protocol analysis R&S USB (option R&S RTP-K60) Start of packet ← Trigger type USB Sets the trigger to the SOP (start of packet) field. The start of packet condition is the end of the SYNC field. The trigger instant is the end of the SOP field. End of packet ←...
Page 848 ® Protocol analysis R&S USB (option R&S RTP-K60) Token Sets the trigger to one out of four different token types: ● "OUT" ● "IN" ● "SOF" ● "SETUP" If no additional conditions are set, the trigger instant is after the PID. If the PID error check is selected: ●...
Page 849 ® Protocol analysis R&S USB (option R&S RTP-K60) You can refine the trigger condition: ● "PID error" on page 851 ● "Payload" on page 851 Remote command: on page 2257 TRIGger<m>:USB:DATA Handshake Sets the trigger to one out of four different handshake types: ●...
Page 850 ® Protocol analysis R&S USB (option R&S RTP-K60) ● if no PID error is found, no trigger is set, even if other selected conditions are met. Otherwise, the trigger instant is defined by the first occurrence of any of the specified additional conditions.
Page 851 ® Protocol analysis R&S USB (option R&S RTP-K60) Remote command: on page 2259 TRIGger<m>:USB:ERRC PID error Defines, whether a packet ID error check is executed or not. Remote command: on page 2266 TRIGger<m>:USB:WPID End Point Defines, whether an endpoint check that meets specific conditions is executed or not. "Condition"...
Page 852 ® Protocol analysis R&S USB (option R&S RTP-K60) "Payload pat- Specifies the payload data pattern that is to be triggered. tern" Remote command: on page 2266 TRIGger<m>:USB:WPAY on page 2258 TRIGger<m>:USB:DPOPerator on page 2258 TRIGger<m>:USB:DPOSition on page 2258 TRIGger<m>:USB:DCONdition on page 2261 TRIGger<m>:USB:PATT Frame number Defines, whether a frame number check that meets specific conditions is executed or...
Page 853 ® Protocol analysis R&S USB (option R&S RTP-K60) on page 2262 TRIGger<m>:USB:PMIN on page 2262 TRIGger<m>:USB:PMAX Defines, whether an SEU check that meets specific conditions is executed or not. S and E represent the Start and End of a start-split transaction, U represents the reserved/Unused bit of a complete-split transaction.
Page 854 ® Protocol analysis R&S USB (option R&S RTP-K60) 3. Tap the "Source" button and select the "Serial bus" trigger source. 4. Select the serial bus that is set to USB 2.0. 5. Tap "Trigger Type USB" and select the trigger type to be used for USB protocol analysis.
Page 855 ® Protocol analysis R&S USB (option R&S RTP-K60) Table 14-30: Content of the Decode results table Column Description State Overall state of the packet: either OK or the relevant error condition (CRC, glitch- ing, ...) Start Start time of the packet. PID type (OUT, IN, DATA0, ...) Addr Address of the recipient...
Page 856 ® Protocol analysis R&S USB (option R&S RTP-K60) Search types Use the "Search Types" dialog to define the event types to be searched for. Individual search parameters (which do not depend on the USB protocol type and trig- ger settings), can be specified in the tabs below the "Search criteria" dialog. Remote command: on page 2283 SEARch:TRIGger:USB:SSOP...
Page 857 ® Protocol analysis R&S USB (option R&S RTP-K60) Token Searches for four different token types: "OUT", "IN", "SOF", or "SETUP", and "Any" token. For "Any" token, there are no additional parameters to be defined. For "OUT", "IN", or "SETUP" tokens, additional search parameters are "Address check"...
Page 858 ® Protocol analysis R&S USB (option R&S RTP-K60) You can refine the search condition: ● "Address check" on page 858 ● "End Point check" on page 858 Remote command: on page 2283 SEARch:TRIGger:USB:SPEC Error condition Searches for the following error conditions: "PID Error"...
Page 859 ® Protocol analysis R&S USB (option R&S RTP-K60) "Condition" Defining a specific endpoint or an endpoint range requires to set the operator to one of the following: equal, not equal, less than, less than or equal, greater than, greater than or equal, in range, out of range. "Min"...
Page 860 ® Protocol analysis R&S USB (option R&S RTP-K60) SC check Searches for the selected Start (0) or Complete (1) SPLIT transaction endpoint, or X (do not care). Remote command: on page 2288 SEARch:TRIGger:USB:WSTC on page 2284 SEARch:TRIGger:USB:STCO Port check Enables the search for a port that meets specific conditions. "Condition"...
Page 861 ® Protocol analysis R&S USB (option R&S RTP-K60) "Max" Sets the end value of an ET range if "Condition" (SEARch:TRIGger: USB:TCONdition) is set to INRange or OORange. Remote command: on page 2287 SEARch:TRIGger:USB:WETCheck on page 2285 SEARch:TRIGger:USB:TCONdition on page 2285 SEARch:TRIGger:USB:TMIN on page 2285 SEARch:TRIGger:USB:TMAX...
Page 862 ® Protocol analysis R&S USB 3.1 (option R&S RTP-K61/K62) 3. If the dialog box does not contain a search entry, tap the "Add" icon to create one, as described in "To create a user-defined search" on page 471. 4. Tap "Source" and select the serial bus that is set to USB 2.0 (e.g. "SerBus1", unless already selected).
Page 863 ® Protocol analysis R&S USB 3.1 (option R&S RTP-K61/K62) ● USB 3.1 Gen 2 for 10 Gbps (also labeled "SuperSpeedPlus" or "SSP") While USB 3.1 Gen 2 is not yet very common, you can use a fast oscilloscope (mini- mum 5 GHz) with option R&S RTP-K61 to analyze signals encoded according to the USB 3.1 Gen 1 protocol.
Page 864 ® Protocol analysis R&S USB 3.1 (option R&S RTP-K61/K62) Connector type USB 3.1 Compatibility USB 2.0 plug ... is not compatible with ... receptacle Micro-USB receptacle ... is backward compatible with ... plug To achieve the data throughput of USB 3.1, all involved components (host, cable, device and optional hub) must comply with USB 3.1 specifications.
Page 865 ® Protocol analysis R&S USB 3.1 (option R&S RTP-K61/K62) Frame types All frame types are listed below. The frame types are sorted in an almost alphabetical order, as in the oscilloscope's graphical user interface (GUI). Each item in this list contains: ●...
Page 866 ® Protocol analysis R&S USB 3.1 (option R&S RTP-K61/K62) ● FWAKe - Function Wake = The function wake device notification is sent from a device (that is enabled for remote wakeup) to the host, if it wants to exit from "device suspend"...
Page 867 ® Protocol analysis R&S USB 3.1 (option R&S RTP-K61/K62) ● STALL - STALL = This transaction packet can only be sent by an endpoint on the device. It is used to inform the host that the endpoint is halted or that a control transfer is invalid.
Page 868 ® Protocol analysis R&S USB 3.1 (option R&S RTP-K61/K62) The frames listed above consist of individual sets of fields. Some frames only contain one field, others are much longer: up to 29 fields (in case of the "ACK" frame). We try to represent the structure of these frames. However, one single table that con- tains all frames and all fields would be very large: 30 by 40 cells.
Page 869 ® Protocol analysis R&S USB 3.1 (option R&S RTP-K61/K62) Frame Field3 Field4 Field5 Field6 Field7 Field8 Fld.9 Field10 Fld.11 U2 Inactivity Time- SubType U2 IT Rsvd Rsvd Rsvd Vendor Device Test SubType Rsvd Vendor ... for fields no. 1, 2 and n+x see Table 14-33 User Manual 1803.6484.02 ─...
Page 870 ® Protocol analysis R&S USB 3.1 (option R&S RTP-K61/K62) User Manual 1803.6484.02 ─ 08...
Page 871 ® Protocol analysis R&S USB 3.1 (option R&S RTP-K61/K62) Table 14-34: Frames without additional fields other than in this table Frame Field1 Field2 Field3 Field4 Field5 Field6 Fld.8 Field9 BCNT BERC BDAT BDAT BERC BERC BRST BRST Data Packet Payload HPSTART Data DPPEND...
Page 872 ® Protocol analysis R&S USB 3.1 (option R&S RTP-K61/K62) 14.19.2.1 USB 3.1 configuration settings Access: [Bus] > "USB 3.1" > "Setup" tab Make sure that the tab of the correct serial bus is selected. Figure 14-32: Serial bus protocol configuration dialog See also: Section 14.1.1, "Setup - general settings",...
Page 873 ® Protocol analysis R&S USB 3.1 (option R&S RTP-K61/K62) Source Defines the source for the data signal. You can select analog channels "C1" to "C4", and also active math and reference waveforms as source. If you want to trigger on the serial bus, analog channel sources are required.
Page 874 ® Protocol analysis R&S USB 3.1 (option R&S RTP-K61/K62) At this tab, you can enable and define the equalization techniques used for the equali- zation at the reciever side of the signal. CTLE Continuous time linear equalization (CTLE) is an equalization that can be used for improving the signal performance.
Page 875 ® Protocol analysis R&S USB 3.1 (option R&S RTP-K61/K62) Remote command: on page 2296 BUS<m>:CTLE:DCGain Channel Length ← CTLE Selects the USB Super Speed channel length. Remote command: on page 2299 BUS<m>:USBThree:PROTocol Defines the settings of the decision feedback equalization (DFE). DFE correction is needed when the channel is distosrted.
Page 876 ® Protocol analysis R&S USB 3.1 (option R&S RTP-K61/K62) 6. Set the logical thresholds: Either enter user-defined values directly in the "Thresh- old" fields, or set the thresholds to the middle reference levels with "Auto thresh- olds". 7. Enable "Decode". For details on configuration settings, see Section 14.19.2.1, "USB 3.1 configuration settings",...
Page 877 ® Protocol analysis R&S USB 3.1 (option R&S RTP-K61/K62) Make sure that: ● In the [Bus] > "Setup" tab: – The correct "Protocol" is selected. – The data sources of the serial bus are channel signals. ● In the "Trigger" > "Setup" tab: –...
Page 878 ® Protocol analysis R&S USB 3.1 (option R&S RTP-K61/K62) Field name / Condition Summary / Enable ← Set details This table lists the field numbers and names in the selected frame together with a sum- mary of the user settings of checking conditions for each field and a checkbox to enable the checking.
Page 879 ® Protocol analysis R&S USB 3.1 (option R&S RTP-K61/K62) Data BitState Defines the data bit state to be checked for the selected field. Permitted bit states are "1", "0" or "X" (do not care). Remote command: on page 2315 TRIGger<m>:USBThree:BIT on page 2315 TRIGger<m>:USBThree:FRAMe<n>:FLD<o>:BIT Index...
Page 880 ® Protocol analysis R&S USB 3.1 (option R&S RTP-K61/K62) 2. In the "Protocol" dialog > "Display" tab, select additional result display settings: "Show decode table" and "Show binary signals". For a description of the display settings, see also Section 14.1.3, "Display", on page 545.
Page 881 ® Protocol analysis R&S USB 3.1 (option R&S RTP-K61/K62) Column Description Numeric value The numeric value of the field Formatted Formatted content of the field, for example HPSTART "F7" = end packet framing (EPF) Remote commands Remote control commands for retrieving decode results are described in Sec- tion 26.18.20, "USB 3.1 (option R&S RTP-K61/K62)",...
Page 882 ® Protocol analysis R&S USB 3.1 (option R&S RTP-K61/K62) Search criteria Use the "Search criteria" dialog to define the search type. If you search for frame con- tent, define the frame type in which data is to be searched. You can define individual search parameters for the fields of the selected frame in the table below the "Search criteria".
Page 883 ® Protocol analysis R&S USB 3.1 (option R&S RTP-K61/K62) on page 2326 SEARch:TRIGger:USBThree:IOPerator on page 2326 SEARch:TRIGger:USBThree:FRAMe<m>:FLD<n>:IOPerator on page 2327 SEARch:TRIGger:USBThree:IMIN on page 2327 SEARch:TRIGger:USBThree:FRAMe<m>:FLD<n>:IMIN on page 2327 SEARch:TRIGger:USBThree:IMAX on page 2327 SEARch:TRIGger:USBThree:FRAMe<m>:FLD<n>:IMAX 14.19.5.2 USB 3.1 search results To get search results, "Enable" the search in the "Control" section of the "Search Setup"...
Page 884 ® Protocol analysis R&S USBPD (option R&S RTP-K63) 3. If the dialog box does not contain a search entry, tap the "Add" icon to create one, as described in "To create a user-defined search" on page 471. 4. Tap "Source" and select the serial bus that is set to USB 3.1 (e.g. "SB1", unless already selected).
Page 885 ® Protocol analysis R&S USBPD (option R&S RTP-K63) ● Alternate modes can be defined through vendor defined messages, which allows for USB connector pins to be used for purposes other than USB Message types In the USBPD protocol, a power delivery connection can be made between a port that supplies power (source) and a port that consumes power (sink).
Page 886 ® Protocol analysis R&S USBPD (option R&S RTP-K63) SCPI Description Message type XFRQ Firmware update request Extended XGBC Get battery cap Extended XGMI Get manufacturer info Extended XGBS Get battery status Extended XMFI Manufacturer info Extended XMSG Message Extended XSRC Sources capabilities message Extended XSRS...
Page 887 ® Protocol analysis R&S USBPD (option R&S RTP-K63) See also: Section 14.1.1, "Setup - general settings", on page 543 Data Defines the source settings for the data signal. You can select analog channels "C1" to "C4", and also active math and reference waveforms as source. If you want to trigger on the serial bus, analog channel sources are required.
Page 888 ® Protocol analysis R&S USBPD (option R&S RTP-K63) "vRd-USB" Sets the threshold at default USB Type-C current. "vRa" Sets the threshold for the low current. Remote command: on page 2334 BUS<m>:USBPd:THRBottom on page 2334 BUS<m>:USBPd:THRMid on page 2334 BUS<m>:USBPd:THRTop Show decode detail If enabled, the data words are broken down into subframes.
Page 889 ® Protocol analysis R&S USBPD (option R&S RTP-K63) Decoding is performed in several steps, and the end results are presented in the decode table. The decode layer selects an interim step for which the decoding result is shown in the honeycomb display. Available are: ●...
Page 890 ® Protocol analysis R&S USBPD (option R&S RTP-K63) Make sure that: ● In the [Bus] > "Setup" tab: – The correct "Protocol" is selected. – The data sources of the serial bus are channel signals. ● In the "Trigger" > "Setup" tab: –...
Page 891 ® Protocol analysis R&S USBPD (option R&S RTP-K63) Set details Select the frame type first, and then open the "Set details" dialog. In this dialog to define the individual parameters for the fields of the selected frame. Enable/ Field name/ Condition ← Set details This table lists the field numbers and names in the selected frame together with a sum- mary of the user settings of checking conditions for each field and a checkbox to enable the checking.
Page 892 ® Protocol analysis R&S USBPD (option R&S RTP-K63) "Max" Sets the maximum value of a range for "Condition" = "In range"/"Out of range". Remote command: on page 2339 TRIGger<m>:USBPd:DOPerator on page 2339 TRIGger<m>:USBPd:FRAMe<n>:FLD<o>:DOPerator on page 2339 TRIGger<m>:USBPd:DMAX on page 2339 TRIGger<m>:USBPd:FRAMe<n>:FLD<o>:DMAX on page 2339 TRIGger<m>:USBPd:DMIN...
Page 893 ® Protocol analysis R&S USBPD (option R&S RTP-K63) 5. If you trigger on errors, enable the error types you want to find. 6. Select the frame types you want to trigger on. 7. For some frame types, you can define the frame fields. For information on how to proceed with the configuration settings, see Sec- tion 14.20.3.1, "USBPD trigger...
Page 894 ® Protocol analysis R&S USBPD (option R&S RTP-K63) Figure 14-33: USBPD protocol: decoded signal The results are shown in two tables: ● "Decode results": contains information about all decoded frames ● "Details frame": contains more detailed information about the selected frame in the "Decode results"...
Page 895 ® Protocol analysis R&S USBPD (option R&S RTP-K63) 14.20.5 Search on decoded USBPD data Using the search functionality, you can find various events in the decoded data. You can find the same events that you can trigger on, and even many more, since several event types can also be combined.
Page 896 ® Protocol analysis R&S USBPD (option R&S RTP-K63) You can define individual search parameters for individual fields in the "Set details" dia- log. To specify these parameters, select a field in this table and define the data and/or index operators and values, or the bit state. For a description of how to set the search conditions, see Section 14.20.3.1, "USBPD trigger...
Page 897 ® Protocol analysis R&S SpaceWire (option R&S RTP-K65) ● on page 2353 SEARch:RESult:USBPd:FRAMe<m>:FLD<n>:STATus? ● on page 2354 SEARch:RESult:USBPd:FRAMe<m>:FLD<n>:STARt? ● on page 2354 SEARch:RESult:USBPd:FRAMe<m>:FLD<n>:STOP? ● on page 2355 SEARch:RESult:USBPd:FRAMe<m>:FLD<n>:VAL? ● on page 2353 SEARch:RESult:USBPd:FRAMe<m>:FLD<n>:FVAL? 14.20.5.3 Searching USBPD data Prerequisite: A serial bus is configured for the USBPD signal to be decoded and ana- lyzed.
Page 898 ® Protocol analysis R&S SpaceWire (option R&S RTP-K65) ● SpaceWire basics....................898 ● SpaceWire configuration..................899 ● SpaceWire trigger....................902 ● SpaceWire decode results..................905 ● Search on decoded SpaceWire data..............906 14.21.1 SpaceWire basics The SpaceWire links are a Point-to-point (P2P) connection between a node and another node or a router.
Page 899 ® Protocol analysis R&S SpaceWire (option R&S RTP-K65) Figure 14-36: SpaceWire control codes 14.21.2 SpaceWire configuration 14.21.2.1 SpaceWire configuration settings Access: [Bus] > "SpaceWire" > "Setup" tab Make sure that the tab of the correct serial bus is selected. See also: Section 14.1.1, "Setup - general settings", on page 543...
Page 900 ® Protocol analysis R&S SpaceWire (option R&S RTP-K65) Strobe Selects the source for the strobe signal. Remote command: on page 2360 BUS<m>:SWIRe:STRBe:SOURce Data Selects the source for the data signal. Remote command: on page 2358 BUS<m>:SWIRe:DATA:SOURce Threshold setup Sets the threshold value for the strobe/data signal. "Threshold"...
Page 901 ® Protocol analysis R&S SpaceWire (option R&S RTP-K65) Bit Position Sets the bit position, the align position for the manual synchronization mode. This can be useful when parity errors exist in the signal, and parity check is the main indicator for the decoder to do packet alignment.
Page 902 ® Protocol analysis R&S SpaceWire (option R&S RTP-K65) Decoding is performed in several steps, and the end results are presented in the decode table. The decode layer selects an interim step for which the decoding result is shown in the honeycomb display. Available are: ●...
Page 903 ® Protocol analysis R&S SpaceWire (option R&S RTP-K65) Type Selects the trigger type for the SpaceWire analysis. "Control frame" Sets the trigger to the selected control type frame. "Data Pattern" Sets the trigger to a defined data pattern or pattern range. "NULL frame"...
Page 904 ® Protocol analysis R&S SpaceWire (option R&S RTP-K65) Data (Time Code) Sets the specified data type for the time code to be triggered on. The trigger data setup consists of a comparison condition and one or two data patterns. In binary format, use the following characters: 1; 0; or X (do not care). To enter the pat- tern in other formats use the bit pattern editor, see Section 14.1.7, "Bit pattern editor",...
Page 905 ® Protocol analysis R&S SpaceWire (option R&S RTP-K65) For the basic trigger settings, proceed in the following way: 1. Press the [Bus] key and select the "Shortcuts" tab. 2. Press "Setup trigger". 3. Tap the "Source" button and select the "Serial bus" trigger source. 4.
Page 906 ® Protocol analysis R&S SpaceWire (option R&S RTP-K65) Table 14-41: Content of the Decode results table Column Description State Overall state of the frame Start Time of frame start in relation to the trigger point Stop Time of frame stop in relation to the trigger point Type Frame type Data...
Page 907 ® Protocol analysis R&S SpaceWire (option R&S RTP-K65) Type Sets the search type for the SpaceWire analysis. "Control frame" Searches for the selected control type frame. "Data Pattern" Searches for a defined data pattern or pattern range. "NULL frame" Searches for a null frame, a frame without usable data. "Time Code"...
Page 908 ® Protocol analysis R&S SpaceWire (option R&S RTP-K65) Remote command: on page 2372 SEARch:TRIGger:SWIRe:TIME:CONDition on page 2372 SEARch:TRIGger:SWIRe:TIME:MAX on page 2373 SEARch:TRIGger:SWIRe:TIME:MIN Data (Data Pattern) Sets the specified data type for the data pattern to be searched for. The data type setup consists of the condition and one or two data patterns.
Page 909 ® Protocol analysis R&S PCIe (option R&S RTP-K72/K73) ● on page 2374 SEARch:RESult:SWIRe:FRAMe<m>:STATe? ● on page 2375 SEARch:RESult:SWIRe:FRAMe<m>:STOP? ● on page 2375 SEARch:RESult:SWIRe:FRAMe<m>:TYPE? 14.21.5.3 Searching SpaceWire Prerequisite: A serial bus is configured for the SpaceWire signal to be decoded and analyzed.
Page 910 ® Protocol analysis R&S PCIe (option R&S RTP-K72/K73) ● PCIe trigger......................920 ● PCIe Gen 1/2 decode results................931 ● PCIe Gen 1/2 search.....................932 14.22.1 The PCIe protocol The PCIe is a high-speed serial computer expansion bus standard. The communication between two PCIe devices is performed through logical connec- tions called links.
Page 911 ® Protocol analysis R&S PCIe (option R&S RTP-K72/K73) SCPI name Description Type CPLLK Completion for Locked Memory Read without Data CPLDLK Completion for Locked Memory Read FA32 / FA64 Fetch and Add AtomicOp Request for 32 bit/ 64-bit addresssing packet format SWP32 / SWP64 Unconditional Swap AtomicOp Request for 32 bit/ 64-bit addresssing packet for-...
Page 912 ® Protocol analysis R&S PCIe (option R&S RTP-K72/K73) SCPI name Description Type Start of data sequence OS Ordered Set MRIFC1 / MRIFC2 Multi-root initialization flow control 1/2 Multi-root DLLP MRUPDFC Multi-root update flow control Multi-root DLLP MRINIT Multi-root initialization Multi-root DLLP MRRESET Multi-root reset Multi-root DLLP...
Page 913 ® Protocol analysis R&S PCIe (option R&S RTP-K72/K73) See also: Section 14.1.1, "Setup - general settings", on page 543 Generation Selects the generation of the PCIe technology. "PCIe Gen1 Selects the PCIe generation 1.0, standard introduced in 2003. It has (2.5 Gbit/s) "...
Page 914 ® Protocol analysis R&S PCIe (option R&S RTP-K72/K73) Lane 0/1/2/3 Select the signal sources for the logical lanes. Usually, the source is one of the analog channels. Reference and math waveforms are available as source if the trigger source is one of the analog channels but not the serial bus.
Page 915 ® Protocol analysis R&S PCIe (option R&S RTP-K72/K73) Low threshold ← Thresholds Sets the lower threshold value for the respective lane. Remote command: on page 2378 BUS<m>:PCIE:LONE:THRLow on page 2378 BUS<m>:PCIE:LTHRee:THRLow on page 2378 BUS<m>:PCIE:LTWO:THRLow on page 2378 BUS<m>:PCIE:LZER:THRLow High threshold ← Thresholds Sets the high threshold value for the respective lane.
Page 916 ® Protocol analysis R&S PCIe (option R&S RTP-K72/K73) ● "Binary" Filter Idle Enables the filtering of idle packets. Remote command: on page 2376 BUS<m>:PCIE:FIDLe Show multiple lanes Displays the result in multiple lanes. Remote command: on page 2378 BUS<m>:PCIE:SMLanes 14.22.2.3 Configuring PCIe Gen 1/2 For configuration, you assign the line to the input channel, set the threshold, the bitrate, and the sync symbol.
Page 917 ® Protocol analysis R&S PCIe (option R&S RTP-K72/K73) Nominal bit rate Sets the quiescent frequency of the PLL. It corresponds to the data rate of the data stream from which the clock is to be recovered. Remote command: on page 2379 BUS<m>:CDR:BITRate PLL settings Phase-locked loop parameters are listed below.
Page 918 ® Protocol analysis R&S PCIe (option R&S RTP-K72/K73) on page 2380 BUS<m>:CDR:PLL:RELBwidth on page 2379 BUS<m>:CDR:PLL:DAMPing Initial phase sync. Defines the phase reference for the first clock edge. "First sample" The first clock edge matches the first sample of the waveform at the left border of the display.
Page 919 ® Protocol analysis R&S PCIe (option R&S RTP-K72/K73) CTLE Continuous time linear equalization (CTLE) is an equalization that can be used for improving the signal performance. It boosts the high frequency noise and the signal. Thus it helps reduce the inter-symbol interference (ISI) on the reciever side. The transfer function for behavioral CTLE is defined as follows: Figure 14-37: Transfer function for behavioral CTLE ω...
Page 920 ® Protocol analysis R&S PCIe (option R&S RTP-K72/K73) DC Gain (A ) ← CTLE Sets the adjustable DC gain. This value can be chosen according to the channel loss characteristics. For low-loss channels, you can set a value close to 0 dB. Remote command: on page 2296 BUS<m>:CTLE:DCGain...
Page 921 ® Protocol analysis R&S PCIe (option R&S RTP-K72/K73) Make sure that: ● In the [Bus] > "Setup" tab: – The correct "Protocol" is selected. – The data sources of the serial bus are channel signals. ● In the "Trigger" > "Setup" tab: –...
Page 922 ® Protocol analysis R&S PCIe (option R&S RTP-K72/K73) "Any type" Triggers on any transaction type. "Mem" Triggers on memory transaction type used for data transfers to mem- ory-mapped locations. "IO" Triggers on I/O transaction type used for data transfers to I/O-map- ped locations.
Page 923 ® Protocol analysis R&S PCIe (option R&S RTP-K72/K73) Remote command: on page 2394 TRIGger<m>:PCIE:TLP:SNOO Requester ID ← TLP (Transaction layer) Triggers on a requester ID, consisting of the requester's bus number, device number, and function number. Remote command: on page 2393 TRIGger<m>:PCIE:TLP:REID Device ID ←...
Page 924 ® Protocol analysis R&S PCIe (option R&S RTP-K72/K73) Completer ID ← TLP (Transaction layer) Triggers on a completer ID, consisting of the completer's bus number, device number, and function number. Remote command: on page 2392 TRIGger<m>:PCIE:TLP:CPID DLLP Type Sets the trigger to the type of DLLP. You can refine the settings for the different types according to their specifications.
Page 925 ® Protocol analysis R&S PCIe (option R&S RTP-K72/K73) Phase ← MRInit ← DLLP MRDLLP conditions Triggers on a phase state. Remote command: on page 2386 TRIGger<m>:PCIE:DLLP:MULT:PHAS VH FC ← MRInit ← DLLP MRDLLP conditions Triggers on a virtual hierarchies flow control presence. Remote command: on page 2387 TRIGger<m>:PCIE:DLLP:MULT:VHFC...
Page 926 ® Protocol analysis R&S PCIe (option R&S RTP-K72/K73) VL Number ← MRInitFC1/InitFC2/UpdateFC ← DLLP MRDLLP conditions Triggers on a virtual link (VL) number. Remote command: on page 2388 TRIGger<m>:PCIE:DLLP:MULT:VLNR VH Absent ← MRInitFC1/InitFC2/UpdateFC ← DLLP MRDLLP conditions Triggers on absent virtual hierarchies (VH). Remote command: on page 2386 TRIGger<m>:PCIE:DLLP:MULT:HABS...
Page 927 ® Protocol analysis R&S PCIe (option R&S RTP-K72/K73) A ← MRReset ← DLLP MRDLLP conditions Triggers on the value of the A bit (Ack/Request). Remote command: on page 2387 TRIGger<m>:PCIE:DLLP:MULT:RESA VH Group ← MRReset ← DLLP MRDLLP conditions Triggers on the selected virtual hierarchies group. Remote command: on page 2388 TRIGger<m>:PCIE:DLLP:MULT:VHGR...
Page 928 ® Protocol analysis R&S PCIe (option R&S RTP-K72/K73) Remote command: on page 2385 TRIGger<m>:PCIE:DLLP:FCTL:VCID DLLP PM conditions Triggers on a specified power management conditions. PM Type ← DLLP PM conditions Triggers on a power management type. Remote command: on page 2388 TRIGger<m>:PCIE:DLLP:POWM DLLP Vendor conditions Triggers on a specified vendor conditions.
Page 929 ® Protocol analysis R&S PCIe (option R&S RTP-K72/K73) "CRC16 error" Triggers on 16-bit cyclic redundancy check (CRC) errors. "LCRC error" Triggers on link cyclic redundancy check (LCRC) errors. "ECRC error" Triggers on end-to-end cyclic redundancy checksum (ECRC) errors. "Invalid sym- Triggers on invalid symbol errors.
Page 930 ® Protocol analysis R&S PCIe (option R&S RTP-K72/K73) "CRC16 error" Triggers on 16-bit cyclic redundancy check (CRC) errors. "LCRC error" Triggers on link cyclic redundancy check (LCRC) errors. "ECRC error" Triggers on end-to-end cyclic redundancy checksum (ECRC) errors. "Unknown Triggers on an unknown packet. packet"...
Page 931 ® Protocol analysis R&S PCIe (option R&S RTP-K72/K73) For the basic trigger settings, proceed in the following way: 1. Press the [Bus] key and select the "Shortcuts" tab. 2. Press "Setup trigger". 3. Tap the "Source" button and select the "Serial bus" trigger source. 4.
Page 932 ® Protocol analysis R&S PCIe (option R&S RTP-K72/K73) Table 14-43: Content of the Decode results table Column Description State Overall state of the packet Start Start time of the packet Type Type of packet Table 14-44: Content of the Details frame table Column Description Sequence count...
Page 933 ® Protocol analysis R&S PCIe (option R&S RTP-K72/K73) Make sure that: ● In the [Bus] > "Setup" tab: – The correct "Protocol" is selected. – The data sources of the serial bus are channel signals. ● In the "Trigger" > "Setup" tab: –...
Page 934 ® Protocol analysis R&S PCIe (option R&S RTP-K72/K73) TLP (Transaction layer) Specifies the search conditions for the transaction layer type search. TLP ← TLP (Transaction layer) Searches for a transaction type. "Any type" Searches for any transaction type. "Mem" Searches for memory transaction type used for data transfers to memory-mapped locations.
Page 935 ® Protocol analysis R&S PCIe (option R&S RTP-K72/K73) Remote command: on page 2417 SEARch:TRIGger:PCIE:TLP:ORDE Snoop ← TLP (Transaction layer) Searches for a snoop state. Remote command: on page 2417 SEARch:TRIGger:PCIE:TLP:SNOO Requester ID ← TLP (Transaction layer) Searches for a requester ID, consisting of the requester's bus number, device number, and function number.
Page 936 ® Protocol analysis R&S PCIe (option R&S RTP-K72/K73) Status ← TLP (Transaction layer) Searches for a completion status. Remote command: on page 2415 SEARch:TRIGger:PCIE:TLP:CPLS Completer ID ← TLP (Transaction layer) Searches for a completer ID, consisting of the completer's bus number, device number, and function number.
Page 937 ® Protocol analysis R&S PCIe (option R&S RTP-K72/K73) Phase ← MRInit ← DLLP MRDLLP conditions Searches for a phase state. Remote command: on page 2406 SEARch:TRIGger:PCIE:DLLP:MULT:PHAS VH FC ← MRInit ← DLLP MRDLLP conditions Searches for a virtual hierarchies flow control presence. Remote command: on page 2407 SEARch:TRIGger:PCIE:DLLP:MULT:VHFC...
Page 938 ® Protocol analysis R&S PCIe (option R&S RTP-K72/K73) VL Number ← MRInitInit FC1/InitFC2/UpdateFC ← DLLP MRDLLP conditions Searches for a virtual link (VL) number. Remote command: on page 2408 SEARch:TRIGger:PCIE:DLLP:MULT:VLNR VH Absent ← MRInitInit FC1/InitFC2/UpdateFC ← DLLP MRDLLP conditions Searches for absent virtual hierarchies (VH). Remote command: on page 2406 SEARch:TRIGger:PCIE:DLLP:MULT:HABS...
Page 939 ® Protocol analysis R&S PCIe (option R&S RTP-K72/K73) A ← MRReset ← DLLP MRDLLP conditions Searches for the value of the A bit (Ack/ Request). Remote command: on page 2406 SEARch:TRIGger:PCIE:DLLP:MULT:RESA VH Group ← MRReset ← DLLP MRDLLP conditions Searches for the selected virtual hierarchies group. Remote command: on page 2408 SEARch:TRIGger:PCIE:DLLP:MULT:VHGR...
Page 940 ® Protocol analysis R&S PCIe (option R&S RTP-K72/K73) Remote command: on page 2405 SEARch:TRIGger:PCIE:DLLP:FCTL:VCID DLLP PM conditions Searches for a specified power management conditions. PM Type ← DLLP PM conditions Searches for a power management type. Remote command: on page 2408 SEARch:TRIGger:PCIE:DLLP:POWM DLLP Vendor conditions Searches for a specified vendor conditions.
Page 941 ® Protocol analysis R&S PCIe (option R&S RTP-K72/K73) "CRC16 error" Searches for 16-bit cyclic redundancy check (CRC) errors. "LCRC error" Searches for link cyclic redundancy check (LCRC) errors. "ECRC error" Searches for end-to-end cyclic redundancy checksum (ECRC) errors. "Invalid sym- Searches for invalid symbol errors.
Page 942 ® Protocol analysis R&S PCIe (option R&S RTP-K72/K73) "CRC16 error" Searches for 16-bit cyclic redundancy check (CRC) errors. "LCRC error" Searches for link cyclic redundancy check (LCRC) errors. "ECRC error" Searches for end-to-end cyclic redundancy checksum (ECRC) errors. "Unknown Searches for an unknown packet. packet"...
Page 943 ® Protocol analysis R&S PCIe (option R&S RTP-K72/K73) The search results are listed in the search result table and marked in the waveform by blue lines. For an introduction to search results, see: ● Section 11.1.2, "Search results", on page 457 ●...
Page 944 ® Protocol analysis R&S DDR (option R&S RTP-K91/K93 ) 3. If the dialog box does not contain a search entry, tap the "Add" icon to create one, as described in "To create a user-defined search" on page 471. 4. Tap "Source" and select the serial bus that is set to PCIe (e.g. "SB1"). 5.
Page 945 ® Protocol analysis R&S DDR (option R&S RTP-K91/K93 ) 14.23.1 DDR configuration 14.23.1.1 DDR configuration settings Access: [Bus] > "DDR" > "Setup" tab Make sure that the tab of the correct serial bus is selected. Figure 14-38: Settings for DDR3 User Manual 1803.6484.02 ─...
Page 946 ® Protocol analysis R&S DDR (option R&S RTP-K91/K93 ) Figure 14-39: Settings for DDR5 See also: Section 14.1.1, "Setup - general settings", on page 543 Variant Selects the DDR standard. "DDR3" Requires option R&S RTP-K91. "DDR4" Requires option R&S RTP-K93. "DDR5"...
Page 947 ® Protocol analysis R&S DDR (option R&S RTP-K91/K93 ) Sets the channel for the data strobe signal. You can select analog channels "C1" to "C4", and also active math and reference waveforms as source. Not available for "Variant" = "LPDDR5". Remote command: on page 2427 BUS<m>:DDR:STRBe:SOURce...
Page 948 ® Protocol analysis R&S DDR (option R&S RTP-K91/K93 ) DQ threshold, DQS threshold ← Set threshods Sets the threshold value for the digitization of the DQ/DQS lane. There are two ways to set the thresholds: ● "Threshold" Enter individual values for each line directly in the fields. ●...
Page 949 ® Protocol analysis R&S DDR (option R&S RTP-K91/K93 ) DQS upper/lower threshold ← Set threshods Only available for "Variant" = "DDR5". Sets the upper and lower threshold value for the digitization of the DQS strobe lane. Remote command: on page 2428 BUS<m>:DDR:STRBe:THLower on page 2428 BUS<m>:DDR:STRBe:THUPper...
Page 950 ® Protocol analysis R&S DDR (option R&S RTP-K91/K93 ) Decode layer Selects the decode layer. Decoding is performed in several layers, and the end results are presented in the decode table. The decode layer selects an interim step for which the decoding result is shown in the honeycomb display.
Page 951 ® Protocol analysis R&S DDR (option R&S RTP-K91/K93 ) Remote command: on page 2428 BUS<m>:DDR:BITRate Read CAS latency (CL) Sets the CAS read latency (CL). It refers to the number of clock cycles that elapse between the time a read command is issued to the memory and the time the requested data is available on the output pins.
Page 952 ® Protocol analysis R&S DDR (option R&S RTP-K91/K93 ) 2. Select the tab of the bus you want to set up, for example "SB1". 3. In the "Setup" tab, set "Protocol"="DDR". 4. Select the DDR "Variant" you want to configure. 5.
Page 953 ® Protocol analysis R&S DDR (option R&S RTP-K91/K93 ) In this dialog, you can define the search type for DDR. DDR search You can select one or more frames to be searched for. Available are "Read", "Write", "Read NC" and "Write NC". You can also define the data and/or index operators and values for the field, see details.
Page 954 ® Protocol analysis R&S DDR (option R&S RTP-K91/K93 ) Remote command: on page 2437 SEARch:TRIGger:DDR:FIENable on page 2437 SEARch:TRIGger:DDR:FRAMe<m>:FLD<n>:ENABle Value ← Set details Sets the data value of the field to be searched for. The search data setup consists of a comparison condition and one or two data patterns.
Page 955 ® Protocol analysis R&S DDR (option R&S RTP-K91/K93 ) "Min" Specifies the value or sets the start value of a range. "Max" Sets the maximum value of a range for "Condition" = "In range"/"Out of range". Remote command: on page 2440 SEARch:TRIGger:DDR:IMAX on page 2440 SEARch:TRIGger:DDR:FRAMe<m>:FLD<n>:IMAX...
Page 956 ® Protocol analysis R&S DDR (option R&S RTP-K91/K93 ) The search for events is set up in the following way: 1. Press the [Bus] key and select the "Shortcuts" tab. 2. If the dialog box does not contain a search entry, tap the "Add" icon to create one, as described in "To create a user-defined search"...
Page 957 ® Protocol analysis R&S DDR (option R&S RTP-K91/K93 ) Decode Results Table The results are shown in two tables: ● "Decode results": contains information about all decoded frames ● "Details frame": contains more detailed information about the selected frame in the "Decode results"...
Page 958 ® Mixed signal option (MSO, R&S RTP-B1) R&S Digital channels and parallel buses 15 Mixed signal option (MSO, R&S RTP-B1) The Mixed Signal Option R&S RTP-B1 adds logic analyzer functions to the classical oscilloscope functions. Using the MSO option, you can analyze and debug embedded systems with mixed-signal designs that use analog signals and correlated digital sig- nals simultaneously.
Page 959 ® Mixed signal option (MSO, R&S RTP-B1) R&S Digital channels and parallel buses 15.1.1.1 Setup Access: "Menu" > "Logic" > "Setup" tab Enable bus Enables the selected parallel bus. The corresponding signal icon appears on the signal bar. If another active bus already uses the same digital channel, the instrument disables the other bus and shows a message.
Page 960 ® Mixed signal option (MSO, R&S RTP-B1) R&S Digital channels and parallel buses Threshold Hysteresis Logic 0 Logic 1 Logic 0 By default, same threshold and hysteresis value are used for all digital channels and all parallel buses: "Couple thresholds" is enabled. You can also set different thresholds for the individual channel groups.
Page 961 ® Mixed signal option (MSO, R&S RTP-B1) R&S Digital channels and parallel buses Remote command: on page 2451 (all buses) BUS<m>:PARallel:THCoupling on page 2447 (bus1) DIGital<m>:THCoupling Hysteresis ← Advanced Defines the size of the hysteresis for the respective channels. "Normal" The instrument sets a small value suitable for the signal and its set- tings.
Page 962 ® Mixed signal option (MSO, R&S RTP-B1) R&S Digital channels and parallel buses Show bus If enabled, the resulting bus signal and bus values are displayed in the diagram. Select the presentation type for the bus signal with "Bus display" on page 962.
Page 963 ® Mixed signal option (MSO, R&S RTP-B1) R&S Digital channels and parallel buses Show table ← Clocked bus The decode table is only available for clocked buses to check the data words. If enabled, a results box opens with decoded values of the bus signal and its time. Each clock edge corresponds to one row in the table.
Page 964 ® Mixed signal option (MSO, R&S RTP-B1) R&S Digital channels and parallel buses 15.1.1.4 Skew settings Access: "Menu" > "Logic" > "Skew" tab Global skew Sets a general delay for all digital channels. The resulting skew of a digital channel is the sum of the general "Global skew"...
Page 965 ® Mixed signal option (MSO, R&S RTP-B1) R&S Digital channels and parallel buses Dig. resolution Shows the current digital resolution of the digital channels. The maximum digital record length is always 200 MSa per digital channel. This number is independent of the instal- led memory.
Page 966 ® Mixed signal option (MSO, R&S RTP-B1) R&S Digital channels and parallel buses 15.1.3 Using digital probes Ensuring accurate measurement results The mixed-signal-option (MSO, R&S RTP-B1) with connected probe leads is consid- ered as a test probe, according to EN 61326-2-1, clause 5.2.4.101. Therefore, the measurements are sensitive to electromagnetic interference.
Page 967 ® Mixed signal option (MSO, R&S RTP-B1) R&S Display The digital signals are shown in the diagram, and the signal icon of the parallel bus appears on the signal bar. Using this bus icon, you can minimize, arrange, and switch off the bus together with its channels in the same way as you do with any waveform.
Page 968 ® Mixed signal option (MSO, R&S RTP-B1) R&S Display You can also drag the bus waveforms on the display and scale them. ● Show the result box of the decoded clocked bus signal Each parallel bus is shown in a separate diagram, and the diagrams can be minimized and arranged as usual.
Page 969 ® Mixed signal option (MSO, R&S RTP-B1) R&S Trigger The results can be saved to a .csv or .html file, see Section 12.2.4, "Results", on page 506. 15.2.2 Adjusting the display of digital channels and parallel buses The display of digital channels and parallel buses is flexible, you can adjust it to your needs by combining the following settings: 1.
Page 970 ® Mixed signal option (MSO, R&S RTP-B1) R&S Trigger Table 15-1: Trigger types and digital trigger sources Trigger type Trigger source is Digital channel Logic combination of Parallel bus digital channels Edge Width Timeout Setup & Hold State Pattern (with holdoff) Serial Pattern In firmware versions <...
Page 971 ® Mixed signal option (MSO, R&S RTP-B1) R&S Trigger Source If the Mixed Signal Option is installed, the variety of trigger sources is enhanced with specific digital trigger sources. As a trigger source you can select: ● One of the digital channels "D0" ... "D15" ●...
Page 972 ® Mixed signal option (MSO, R&S RTP-B1) R&S Trigger Figure 15-1: Edge trigger settings for trigger source = logical combination of digital channels (Logic) Slope Defines the edge - the state transition - of the signal. "Positive" Means a 0 to 1 transition of the state. "Negative"...
Page 973 ® Mixed signal option (MSO, R&S RTP-B1) R&S Trigger Figure 15-2: Width trigger settings for trigger source = logical combination of digital channels Polarity Sets the polarity of a pulse to "Positive", "Negative", or "Both". When triggering on a positive pulse, the trigger event occurs on the high to low transi- tion of the pulse if the timing condition is true.
Page 974 ® Mixed signal option (MSO, R&S RTP-B1) R&S Trigger Width For the ranges "Shorter" and "Longer", the width defines the maximum and minimum pulse width, respectively. For the ranges "Within" and "Outside", the width defines the center of a range which is defined by the limits "±Delta".
Page 975 ® Mixed signal option (MSO, R&S RTP-B1) R&S Trigger "Stays high" The level of a digital channel stays above the threshold, or the logical expression for "Logic" trigger source is true. "Stays low" The level of a digital channel stays below the threshold, or the logical expression for "Logic"...
Page 976 ® Mixed signal option (MSO, R&S RTP-B1) R&S Trigger Figure 15-4: Setup & Hold trigger settings Clock source Selects the digital channel of the clock signal. Remote command: on page 2459 TRIGger<t>:PARallel:SETHold:CSOurce[:VALue] on page 2459 TRIGger<t>:PARallel:STATe:CSOurce:VALue on page 2459 TRIGger<t>:PARallel:SPATtern:CSOurce[:VALue] Clock edge Sets the edge of the clock signal.
Page 977 ® Mixed signal option (MSO, R&S RTP-B1) R&S Trigger Remote command: on page 2464 TRIGger<t>:PARallel:SETHold:HTIMe 15.3.1.6 State The state trigger detects the logical state of several logically combined digital channels at a given clock edge. The trigger source is a logical combination of digital channels or a parallel bus.
Page 978 ® Mixed signal option (MSO, R&S RTP-B1) R&S Trigger Remote command: on page 2465 TRIGger<t>:PARallel:STATe:BIT<n> Logical expression Defines a logic combination of several digital channels as trigger condition if "Logic" is set for "Source". The "Qualification Editor" supports the entry of the expression. Remote command: on page 2460 TRIGger<t>:PARallel:TIMeout:EXPRession[:DEFine]...
Page 979 ® Mixed signal option (MSO, R&S RTP-B1) R&S Trigger Logical expression Defines a logic combination of several digital channels as trigger condition if "Logic" is set for "Source". The "Qualification Editor" supports the entry of the expression. Remote command: on page 2460 TRIGger<t>:PARallel:TIMeout:EXPRession[:DEFine] on page 2460 TRIGger<t>:PARallel:STATe:EXPRession[:DEFine]...
Page 980 ® Mixed signal option (MSO, R&S RTP-B1) R&S Trigger Width settings The width settings "Range", "Width" and "±Delta" appear if the timing mode is set to "Width". Range ← Width settings Selects how the range of a pulse width is defined: Triggers when the pattern comes false inside a given time range.
Page 981 ® Mixed signal option (MSO, R&S RTP-B1) R&S Trigger Figure 15-7: Serial pattern trigger settings for trigger source = logical combination of digital channels Clock edge Sets the edge of the clock signal. The bit value is determined at the crossing of the clock edge and the logical threshold.
Page 982 ® Mixed signal option (MSO, R&S RTP-B1) R&S Measurements on digital channels Remote command: on page 2469 TRIGger<t>:PARallel:SPATtern:PATTern 15.3.2 Triggering on digital signals and parallel buses For a detailed description of the settings, see Section 15.3.1, "Trigger settings for digi- tal signals and parallel buses", on page 970.
Page 983 ® Mixed signal option (MSO, R&S RTP-B1) R&S Data export These are: ● Period ● Frequency ● Positive and negative pulse ● Pulse count ● Delay ● Phase ● Positive and negative duty cycle ● Burst width ● Edge count Except for delay measurement, the measurements have the same settings and results for analog and digital sources.
Page 984 ® Mixed signal option (MSO, R&S RTP-B1) R&S Search All data formats can be saved to XML, CSV, and BIN files. If you save binary format to XML or CSV, you can see the values of each line for each sample. In BIN files, 4 Bytes are written for each sample.
Page 985 ® Mixed signal option (MSO, R&S RTP-B1) R&S Search It is also possible to search on digital channels for specified events. Search conditions use the same parameters as the trigger event definition, see Section 15.3.1, "Trigger settings for digital signals and parallel buses", on page 970.
Page 986 ® Waveform generator (option R&S RTP-B6) R&S Setup of the waveform generator 16 Waveform generator (option R&S RTP-B6) The R&S RTP includes an integrated waveform generator which can generate input signals and patterns during testing. You can setup and output two waveform genera- tors and a pattern generator.
Page 987 ® Waveform generator (option R&S RTP-B6) R&S Setup of the waveform generator Make sure that the tab of the correct waveform generator is selected on the left side. The settings of the waveform generators are not affected by an instrument preset. Press "Preset Gen1/2"...
Page 988 ® Waveform generator (option R&S RTP-B6) R&S Setup of the waveform generator ● Section 16.1.2, "Function generator", on page 988 ● Section 16.1.3, "Modulation", on page 993 ● Section 16.1.4, "Sweep", on page 999 ● Section 16.1.5, "Arbitrary", on page 1000 Remote command: on page 2472 WGENerator<wg>:SOURce...
Page 989 ® Waveform generator (option R&S RTP-B6) R&S Setup of the waveform generator "Square" Generates a square wave. You can set its Frequency, Period Duty cycle. "Ramp" Generates a ramp signal. You can set its Frequency, Period Symmetry. "DC" Generates a direct current (DC) signal. You can set the "Absolute level"...
Page 990 ® Waveform generator (option R&S RTP-B6) R&S Setup of the waveform generator "Pulse" Generates a pulse signal. You can set the Frequency, Period Pulse width. "Cardinal sine" Generates a cardinal sine wave. You can set the Frequency Period. User Manual 1803.6484.02 ─ 08...
Page 991 ® Waveform generator (option R&S RTP-B6) R&S Setup of the waveform generator "Cardiac" Generates a cardiac signal. You can set the Frequency and Period. "Gauss" Generates a gauss signal . You can set the Frequency and Period. "Lorentz" Generates a Lorentz signal . You can set the Frequency and Period.
Page 992 ® Waveform generator (option R&S RTP-B6) R&S Setup of the waveform generator "Exp. rise" Generates an exponential rise signal. You can set the Frequency Period. "Exp. fall" Generates an exponential fall signal. You can set the Frequency Period. Remote command: on page 2473 WGENerator<wg>:FUNCtion[:SELect] Frequency...
Page 993 ® Waveform generator (option R&S RTP-B6) R&S Setup of the waveform generator "Function type" Min frequency Max frequency "Pulse" 0.001 Hz 30 MHz "Cardinal sine" 0.001 Hz 5 MHz "Cardiac" 0.001 Hz 1 MHz "Gauss" 0.001 Hz 25 MHz "Lorentz" 0.001 Hz 10 MHz "Exp.rise"...
Page 994 ® Waveform generator (option R&S RTP-B6) R&S Setup of the waveform generator 16.1.3.1 General settings Consists of settings for selecting the modulation type. Modulation type Selects the modulation type, which defines how the carrier signal is modified. "AM" Amplitude modulation. See: Section 16.1.3.2, "AM modulation",...
Page 995 ® Waveform generator (option R&S RTP-B6) R&S Setup of the waveform generator Carrier period Sets the period of the carrier signal. Remote command: on page 2477 WGENerator<wg>:MODulation:CARRier:PERiod 16.1.3.2 AM modulation For amplitude modulation (AM), the amplitude of the carrier signal is varied according to the modulation signal.
Page 996 ® Waveform generator (option R&S RTP-B6) R&S Setup of the waveform generator Remote command: on page 2476 WGENerator<wg>:MODulation:AM:DEPTh Symmetry Sets the symmetry for the ramp modulation waveform, the percentage of time that the waveform is rising. Remote command: on page 2476 WGENerator<wg>:MODulation:AM:SYMMetry Duty cycle Sets the duty cycle for a square waveform.
Page 997 ® Waveform generator (option R&S RTP-B6) R&S Setup of the waveform generator Remote command: on page 2481 WGENerator<wg>:MODulation:PWM[:FUNCtion] Modulation freq Sets the frequency of the modulation waveform. Remote command: on page 2481 WGENerator<wg>:MODulation:PWM:FREQuency Modulation depth Sets the modulation depth, the percentage of the pulse width range that is used for the modulation.
Page 998 ® Waveform generator (option R&S RTP-B6) R&S Setup of the waveform generator Modulation signal Selects the type of the modulation signal for the FM modulation types. Remote command: on page 2479 WGENerator<wg>:MODulation:FM[:FUNCtion] Modulation freq Sets the frequency of the modulation waveform. Remote command: on page 2478 WGENerator<wg>:MODulation:FM:FREQuency...
Page 999 ® Waveform generator (option R&S RTP-B6) R&S Setup of the waveform generator Duty cycle Sets the duty cycle for a square waveform. The duty cycle expresses the percentage of the period during which the waveform is active, i.e. the signal state is high. Remote command: on page 2478 WGENerator<wg>:MODulation:FM:DCYCle...
Page 1000 ® Waveform generator (option R&S RTP-B6) R&S Setup of the waveform generator Start frequency Sets the start frequency of the sweep signal. Remote command: on page 2482 WGENerator<wg>:SWEep:FSTart Stop freuqency Sets the stop frequency of the sweep signal. Remote command: on page 2482 WGENerator<wg>:SWEep[:FEND] Sweep time...

This manual is also suitable for:

Rtp064bRtp084bRtp134bRtp164b1803.7000k041803.7000k06 ... Show all